WO2021134207A1 - Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device - Google Patents

Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021134207A1
WO2021134207A1 PCT/CN2019/129905 CN2019129905W WO2021134207A1 WO 2021134207 A1 WO2021134207 A1 WO 2021134207A1 CN 2019129905 W CN2019129905 W CN 2019129905W WO 2021134207 A1 WO2021134207 A1 WO 2021134207A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
port
transmitting antenna
channel state
state information
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/129905
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
金黄平
尚鹏
刘祥龙
张碧军
毕晓艳
陈大庚
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/129905 priority Critical patent/WO2021134207A1/en
Publication of WO2021134207A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021134207A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a method and communication device for indicating and determining channel state information.
  • the antenna's spatial resolution can be maximized through the design of the antenna.
  • the area of the antenna array determines the spatial resolution of the antenna array.
  • the area of the antenna panel is often limited. In order to improve system throughput, consider deploying antenna units that can provide more ports (for example, four ports, or even more ports) in the antenna panel.
  • the present application provides a method and communication device for indicating and determining channel state information, so as to be applicable to a transmitting device including antenna units with multiple transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics.
  • a method for indicating channel state information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by, for example, a receiving device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the receiving device. This application does not limit this.
  • the method can be applied to a system including a sending device and a receiving device.
  • the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units.
  • Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel.
  • the method includes: generating reference channel state information and port difference information, where the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate the reference transmit antenna port and the non-reference transmit antenna port in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the two; send the reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the reference transmitting antenna port may be predefined.
  • the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Any antenna port in a transmitting antenna unit can be defined as a reference transmitting antenna port. This application does not limit the definition of the reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the reference channel state information may be obtained based on one or more reference transmission channels, or in other words, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on part or all of the reference transmission channels between the sending device and the terminal device.
  • the port difference information may include information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units and used to indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in the transmitting antenna unit.
  • the port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the receiving device described herein may specifically be a device that receives signals (such as reference signals) sent by the sending device through multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the receiving device is a terminal device and the sending device is a network device.
  • the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the communication system.
  • the method further includes: receiving instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  • the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit can be understood as the number of transmitting antenna ports provided by each transmitting antenna unit, or the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • each transmitting antenna unit defines a reference transmitting antenna port
  • the number of non-reference transmitting antenna ports is related to the number of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit. Therefore, both the port difference information and the reference channel state information are related to the number of transmitting antenna ports.
  • the indication of the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit by the transmitting device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. This application does not limit the specific instructions of N.
  • a method for determining channel state information is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a sending device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the sending device. This application does not limit this.
  • the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units.
  • Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel.
  • the method includes: receiving reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information may be used to indicate channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information may be used to indicate a reference transmit antenna in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port; the channel state information is determined according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
  • the reference transmitting antenna port may be predefined.
  • the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Any antenna port in a transmitting antenna unit can be defined as a reference transmitting antenna port. This application does not limit the definition of the reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the reference channel state information may be obtained based on one or more reference transmission channels, or in other words, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on part or all of the reference transmission channels between the sending device and the terminal device.
  • the port difference information may include information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units and used to indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in the transmitting antenna unit.
  • the port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the receiving device described here may specifically be a device that receives signals (such as reference signals) sent from the sending device through multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the receiving device is a terminal device and the sending device is a network device.
  • the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the communication system.
  • the method further includes: sending instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  • the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit can be understood as the number of transmitting antenna ports provided by each transmitting antenna unit, or the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • each transmitting antenna unit defines a reference transmitting antenna port
  • the number of non-reference transmitting antenna ports is related to the number of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit. Therefore, both the port difference information and the reference channel state information are related to the number of transmitting antenna ports.
  • the indication of the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit by the transmitting device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. This application does not limit the specific instructions of N.
  • a communication device may be a receiving device or a component in the receiving device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication device can be applied to a system including a receiving device and a transmitting device.
  • the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units.
  • Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel. It is understandable that if the communication device is a receiving device, the receiving device described here can be replaced with the communication device.
  • the communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit.
  • the processing unit can be used to generate reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate whether the reference transmission antenna port in each transmission antenna unit is different from the non-reference transmission.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between antenna ports; the transceiver unit can be used to send the reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to receive indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  • a communication device may be a sending device or a component in the sending device.
  • the communication device may include various modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication device can be applied to a system including a receiving device and a transmitting device.
  • the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units.
  • Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel. It is understandable that if the communication device is a sending device, the sending device described here can be replaced with the communication device.
  • the communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit.
  • the transceiver unit can be used to receive reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate the reference transmit antenna port and non-reference transmission in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the antenna ports;
  • the processing unit can be used to determine the channel state information according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to send instruction information, and the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a receiving device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in the receiving device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the communication device to which the communication device belongs may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device equipped with the communication device may be equipped with one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a sending device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes a plurality of transmitting antenna ports.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in the sending device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • the communication device equipped with the communication device may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes a plurality of transmitting antenna ports.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect. The method in the way.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips
  • the input circuit can be an input pin
  • the output circuit can be an output pin
  • the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and any one of the first aspect to the second aspect. In the method.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving reference channel state information and port difference information may be a process of inputting reference channel state information and port difference information to the processor.
  • the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the above eighth aspect may be one or more chips.
  • the processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be one or more general-purpose processors, which are implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory,
  • the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect above.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned receiving device and sending device.
  • the receiving device may be a terminal device
  • the sending device may be a network device
  • each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports.
  • each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports
  • the port difference information includes an indication of R sets of coefficients corresponding to each of the R transmission layers
  • each set of coefficients includes N-1 coefficients , R ⁇ 1, N>1, R and N are integers.
  • the N-1 coefficients can be specifically used to represent the difference in radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the N-1 non-reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • each set of coefficients indicated by the port difference information can correspond to a transport layer.
  • Each set of coefficients can be used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the transmission layer.
  • each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients, where N>1 and an integer.
  • the N(N-1)/2 coefficients are used to express the difference in radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and N-1 non-reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit, and also to express each The radiation characteristic difference between every two non-reference transmitting antenna ports in the N-1 non-reference transmitting antennas in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • the N(N-1)/2 coefficients indicated by the port difference information do not correspond to the transmission layer.
  • the N(N-1)/2 coefficients can be used to determine the covariance matrix of the channel.
  • the port difference information of the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same.
  • the port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different. Therefore, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit can be represented by the same information, or can be represented by different information.
  • the reference transmitting antenna ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units may have the same or similar (or close) radiation characteristics.
  • the reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit may be The positions of the transmitting antenna units are the same. In this case, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit may be the same.
  • the indication of the port difference information by the receiving device may only include an indication of the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in one transmitting antenna unit, or in other words, it may only indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in one transmitting antenna unit Or, in other words, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit can be indicated by the same port difference information.
  • the reference channel state information is specifically used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transmission layers, and R is a positive integer.
  • the reference channel state information may be determined based on the covariance matrices of multiple reference transmission channels. Exemplarily, performing singular value decomposition on the covariance matrices of multiple reference transmission channels may obtain R eigenvectors, and the R eigenvectors may correspond to R transmission layers.
  • the receiving device can represent multiple reference transmission channels between the sending device and the receiving device through a reference transmission channel or a mathematical transformation of a reference transmission channel.
  • the difference between two reference transmission channels can be represented by a coefficient.
  • the receiving device may also separately indicate the channel state information of multiple reference transmission channels between the sending device and the receiving device. This application does not limit this.
  • the rth vector in the R vectors is used to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer in the R transmission layers, and 1 ⁇ r ⁇ R, and r is a positive integer.
  • the R vectors are combined with the aforementioned port difference information and can be used to determine the precoding vectors respectively corresponding to the R transmission layers.
  • the channel state information determined by the transmitting device based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information is not limited to the precoding vector, and may also be a channel, a covariance matrix of the channel, and the like. This application does not limit this.
  • the R vectors are R basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set
  • the reference channel state information includes an indication of the R basis vectors in the basis vector set.
  • the receiving device can indicate the R vectors through port selection.
  • each of the R vectors is a linear superposition sum of one or more base vectors in a predefined set of base vectors
  • the reference channel state information includes the corresponding information to each of the R vectors.
  • the receiving device can indicate the R vectors in a linear combination of beams.
  • the reference channel state information is also used to indicate at least one power coefficient, and the at least one power coefficient is used to indicate a power ratio between vectors corresponding to each transmission layer.
  • the receiving device may further indicate the R characteristic values corresponding to the R characteristic vectors obtained by the above SVD to the sending device.
  • the R eigenvalues can represent the power ratio between the corresponding R eigenvectors. Therefore, in this application, the R eigenvalues are defined as information that can be used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers.
  • the receiving device does not limit the way of indicating the R characteristic values. For example, use a normalized way to indicate and so on.
  • the channel state information determined by further combining the R eigenvalues is more accurate, and is more conducive to improving system transmission performance.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method for indicating and determining channel state information according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a dual polarization direction antenna unit provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a four-port QHA unit provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a channel between a sending device and a receiving device according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of indicating and determining channel state information provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide Interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio access technology
  • 5G mobile communication system can be non-standalone (NSA) or standalone (SA).
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks.
  • MTC machine type communication
  • LTE-M inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology
  • D2D device-to-device
  • M2M machine to machine
  • IoT Internet of things
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles.
  • V2X vehicle to other devices
  • V2X vehicle to X
  • X can represent anything
  • the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle to vehicle
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle to pedestrian communication
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • the technical solution provided herein can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6 th Generation, 6G), mobile communication systems. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR ,
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • the CU implements part of the functions of gNB, and the DU implements part of the functions of gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical
  • AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU.
  • the network device may be a device including one or more of the CU node, the DU node, and the AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It can also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell.
  • the small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
  • terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or
  • wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband NB technology.
  • terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc.
  • the main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 in the 5G system shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, as shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 102 to 107.
  • the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed.
  • the network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1 constitute a communication system.
  • the terminal devices can communicate directly.
  • D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices.
  • D2D technology can be used for direct communication.
  • the terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
  • the terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101, as shown in the figure, the terminal devices 105 and 106 can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 106 101 communication.
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
  • Each of the aforementioned communication devices may be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • a component such as a chip or a chip system, etc.
  • network devices For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
  • Network equipment can process code words on physical channels.
  • the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding).
  • the codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits.
  • the scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols.
  • Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, after layer mapping.
  • the modulation symbols after the layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal.
  • the precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • Antenna port It can be abbreviated as a port.
  • the antenna port may include a transmitting antenna port (or called a transmitting antenna port) and a receiving antenna port.
  • the transmitting antenna port may refer to the transmitting antenna port of the transmitting device.
  • the receiving antenna port may refer to the receiving antenna port of the receiving device.
  • the transmitting antenna port can be understood as the transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or the transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • the transmitting antenna port may refer to the transmitting antenna port of the network device.
  • the receiving antenna port can be understood as the receiving antenna of the receiving device.
  • the receiving port may refer to the receiving antenna of the terminal device.
  • the radiation characteristics can specifically refer to the directional characteristics of the antenna radiation.
  • the relationship between the relative field strength (for example, amplitude and phase) and the direction of the radiation field in the far area of the antenna is represented by a curve, and the radiation pattern of the antenna can be obtained.
  • the radiation direction characteristics of each transmitting antenna port are different.
  • the radiation patterns corresponding to the transmitting antenna ports are also different from each other.
  • Antenna unit In multi-antenna technology, transmitting equipment (such as network equipment) is usually equipped with a large-scale antenna array.
  • the antenna array may include one or more antenna elements.
  • Each antenna unit can be independent of each other.
  • each antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports. Moreover, the radiation characteristics of the multiple transmitting antenna ports included in each antenna unit are different from each other.
  • the antenna unit may be a two-port antenna unit.
  • Each two-port antenna unit may include two transmitting antenna ports, and the two transmitting antenna ports have different radiation characteristics.
  • the two-port antenna unit may be, for example, a dual polarization direction antenna unit.
  • the so-called polarization direction refers to the direction of electric field oscillation formed when the antenna radiates. Therefore, polarization can be understood as a manifestation of radiation characteristics.
  • the dual polarization direction antenna unit may include a transmitting antenna port in a first polarization direction and a transmitting antenna port in a second polarization direction.
  • the first polarization direction and the second polarization direction may be two different polarization directions.
  • the transmitting antenna ports provided by the dual polarization direction antenna unit are two transmitting antenna ports with different polarization directions.
  • the first polarization direction may be, for example, the horizontal polarization direction
  • the second polarization direction may be, for example, the vertical polarization direction
  • the first polarization direction may also be, for example, the +45° direction
  • the second polarization direction may be the +45° direction.
  • the direction may also be a -45° direction, for example. This application does not limit this.
  • Fig. 2 is an example of a dual polarization direction antenna unit provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 shows 4 dual-polarized antenna elements, where, regardless of the coupling between the antenna elements in the antenna array, port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 are the first polarization directions Port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 are the transmitting antenna ports of the second polarization direction.
  • port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 have the same polarization direction, or in other words, have the same radiation characteristics.
  • Port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 have the same polarization direction, or in other words, have the same radiation characteristics.
  • the antenna unit may be a four-port antenna unit.
  • Each four-port antenna unit may include four transmitting antenna ports, and the radiation characteristics of the four transmitting antenna ports are different from each other.
  • the four-port antenna unit may be, for example, a quadrifilar helix antenna (QHA) unit (hereinafter referred to as a four-port QHA unit) independently driven by each spiral arm.
  • QHA quadrifilar helix antenna
  • Fig. 3 is an example of a four-port QHA unit provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, Figure 3 shows two four-port QHA units, in which, regardless of the coupling between the antenna elements in the antenna array, ports 1 and 5 have the same radiation characteristics, and ports 2 and 6 have the same radiation Characteristics, ports 3 and 7 have the same radiation characteristics, and ports 4 and 8 have the same radiation characteristics.
  • the arrangement of the antenna units shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • the arrangement of the two-port antenna unit shown in FIG. 2 may be one row and four columns, two rows and two columns, or one column and four rows.
  • the arrangement of the four-port antenna unit shown in FIG. 3 may be one row and two columns, or two rows and one column. This application does not limit this.
  • the dimension of the channel matrix between the transmitting device and the receiving device can be determined by the number of receiving antenna ports of the receiving device and the number of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device. Assuming that the number of receiving antenna ports of the receiving device is R and the number of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device is T, the channel matrix may be a matrix with a dimension of R ⁇ T. Each element in the matrix can represent channel information between a transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port.
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of a channel between a sending device and a receiving device.
  • the number T of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device is 4, and the number of receiving antenna ports R of the receiving device is 2.
  • h 11 , h 12 , h 13 , and h 14 can respectively represent port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4 of the transmitting antenna port
  • the channel between the port 1 and the receiving antenna port, h 21 , h 22 , h 23 , and h 24 can respectively represent the port 1, port 2, port 3, port 4 of the transmitting antenna port and the port of the receiving antenna port
  • each antenna unit may include multiple antenna ports with different radiation characteristics.
  • the multiple antenna ports included in each antenna unit are divided into reference antenna ports and non-reference antenna ports.
  • the reference antenna port and the non-reference antenna port are relative terms. Among the multiple antenna ports of the same antenna unit, the radiation characteristics of the antenna ports are different from each other. In order to facilitate the distinction, one of the ports is defined as a reference antenna port, and the other one or more antenna ports in the same antenna unit are defined as a non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • each antenna unit may include a reference antenna port and a non-reference antenna port; for a four-port antenna unit, each antenna unit may include a reference antenna port and three non-reference antenna ports. Antenna port.
  • the reference antenna port in each antenna unit may be predefined, which is not limited in this application.
  • the reference antenna port has the same or similar radiation characteristics.
  • port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 are the antenna ports in the first polarization direction, which can be respectively defined as their respective antenna units.
  • port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 can be respectively defined as the non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong; or, port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 are the first
  • the antenna ports in the two polarization directions can also be defined as the reference antenna ports in their respective antenna units, while port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 can be defined as non-standard antenna ports in their respective antenna units. Reference antenna port.
  • port 1 and port 5 have the same radiation characteristics and can be respectively defined as the reference antenna port in the antenna unit to which they belong, and port 2, port 3 , Port 4, port 6, port 7, and port 8 can be respectively defined as non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong; or, port 2 and port 6 have the same radiation characteristics, or they can be defined as respective The reference antenna port in the antenna unit to which it belongs, and port 1, port 3, port 4, port 5, port 7, and port 8 can be respectively defined as non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong.
  • used to indicate may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication.
  • indication information when describing a certain indication information to indicate information I, it can include the indication information directly indicating I or indirectly indicating I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance.
  • the port difference information in multiple transmitting antenna units can be uniformly indicated.
  • one information element IE
  • the port difference information indicated by the information element may be applicable to the foregoing multiple transmit antenna units.
  • the port difference information indicated by the information element is information that can be used by the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the overhead of indicating port difference information can be reduced.
  • there are many instructions for the same information For the sake of brevity, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted hereafter.
  • the indication of multiple coefficients can be realized by means of pre-arrangement (for example, stipulated by agreement).
  • the indication of N-1 coefficients can be normalized.
  • the receiving device can indicate the position of the coefficient with the largest modulus among the N-1 coefficients and the quantized value of the other N-2 coefficients with respect to the coefficient with the largest modulus, but it is not necessary to The values of -1 coefficients are all indicated.
  • the sending device can determine the N-1 coefficients in the same manner, so the indication can be regarded as an indication of the N-1 coefficients.
  • many places involve the indication of multiple coefficients. For the sake of brevity, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted hereafter.
  • the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof.
  • various indication modes reference may be made to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur.
  • the required indication mode can be selected according to specific needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the selected indication mode.
  • the instruction methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be instructed to obtain the information to be instructed.
  • a row vector can be expressed as a column vector
  • a matrix can be expressed by the transpose matrix of the matrix
  • a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of the other vector.
  • the information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, medium access control (MAC) layer signaling, such as MAC-CE , And physical layer signaling, such as one or a combination of at least two of downlink control information (DCI).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC medium access control
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the R transport layers may include the first transport layer to the Rth transport layer.
  • I will not illustrate them one by one here.
  • the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it can also be numbered consecutively starting from 1.
  • the R transport layers may include the 0th transport layer to the R-1th transport layer, and so on.
  • the superscript T represents transpose, for example, AT represents the transpose of matrix (or vector) A;
  • the superscript H represents conjugate transpose, for example, A H represents the conjugate transpose of matrix (or vector) A.
  • the superscript * represents the conjugate, for example, A * represents the conjugate of the matrix (or vector) A.
  • the superscript * can also indicate the conjugate of a complex number. This application does not limit this. For the sake of brevity in the following text, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted.
  • the terminal device in the following embodiments can be replaced with a receiving device, and the network device can be replaced with a sending device.
  • This application does not limit the devices specifically referred to by the receiving device and the sending device. As long as the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device can provide multiple antenna ports, the method provided in this application can be used to indicate and determine the channel state information.
  • the channel state information (channel state information, CSI) is the protocol information of the current feedback to the terminal apparatus for describing channel network device Third Generation Partnership state (3 rd generation partnership project, 3GPP ). But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the receiving device in this application may also send channel state information to the sending device to indicate the channel state between the sending device and the receiving device.
  • the channel state information is not limited to the precoding matrix indicator (PMI) defined in the 3GPP protocol, and can also be used to indicate other information that can be used to indicate the channel state, such as the covariance of the channel described below. Matrix etc.
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • “pre-defined” or “pre-configured” can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the equipment (for example, including terminal equipment and network equipment).
  • the specific implementation method is not limited.
  • "saving” may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c.
  • a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • antenna ports or called ports
  • transmitting antenna ports or called transmitting antenna ports, transmitting ports
  • receiving antenna ports or called receiving ports
  • the transmitting antenna port is the antenna port configured by the transmitting device
  • the receiving antenna port is the antenna port configured by the receiving device.
  • the "transmit" and “receive” indications are defined for the convenience of distinction, and the antenna ports are not distinguished by transmitting/receiving when the transmitting device or the receiving device is not involved.
  • the embodiments of the present application also involve antenna units and transmitting antenna units, reference antenna ports and reference transmitting antenna ports, non-reference antenna ports and non-reference transmitting antenna ports.
  • “transmit” is intended to emphasize that the antenna unit, or reference antenna port, or non-reference antenna port is the antenna unit, or reference antenna port, or non-reference antenna port configured in the transmitting device.
  • the transmitting device is not involved, it may not be emphasized that it is a transmitting antenna unit, a reference transmitting antenna port, and a non-reference transmitting antenna port.
  • the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes multiple transmitting antenna ports. Moreover, the multiple transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. In the embodiment of the present application, the number of transmit antenna ports included in each transmit antenna unit is the same, for example, N (N>1 and an integer).
  • the receiving device may also include one or more receiving antenna ports. This application does not limit this.
  • the channel between a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can be referred to as a reference transmission channel. In other words, a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port constitute a reference transmission channel.
  • the sending device is a network device
  • the receiving device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device can indicate the channel state information of the downlink channel to the network device based on the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the following will take the interaction between the network device and the terminal device as an example to describe in detail the method for indicating channel state information provided in the embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that this application does not limit the sending device and the receiving device.
  • the transmitting device is configured with antenna units including transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics, the methods described below can be used.
  • the terminal device shown in the following embodiments can be replaced with a functional module in the terminal device that can call and execute the program, such as a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
  • the network device shown in the following embodiment can also be replaced with a functional module in the network device that can call and execute the program, for example, a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or various operations. Deformation of the operation. In addition, each step may be executed in a different order presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all the operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method 500 for indicating channel state information from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 5, the method 500 may include step 510 to step 540. The steps in the method 500 are described in detail below.
  • step 510 the terminal device generates reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the reference channel state information may specifically refer to channel state information obtained from at least one reference transmission channel. Since each reference transmission channel is composed of a reference antenna port and a receiving antenna port, the reference channel state information can be composed of at least one of the multiple transmitting antenna units in the transmitting device and one or more of the receiving device. The channel between the receiving ports is determined.
  • the reference channel state information may be, for example, the channel itself of the reference transmission channel, or it may be obtained after performing mathematical transformation on the at least one reference transmission channel.
  • the matrix formed by at least one reference channel is obtained by mathematical transformation.
  • each reference transmitting antenna port belongs to a transmitting antenna unit, and each transmitting antenna unit also includes at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port
  • the terminal device may further indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between the ports, so that the non-reference transmitting antenna
  • the channel state information between the port and the receiving port is also indirectly expressed through the difference in radiation characteristics between the ports.
  • the radiation characteristic difference between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit may be represented by port difference information.
  • the port difference information can be characterized by coefficients.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between any non-reference antenna port and the reference antenna port can be characterized by coefficients.
  • the antenna port in the first polarization direction in the dual-polarization antenna unit is a reference antenna port
  • the antenna port in the second polarization direction is a non-reference antenna port.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between the reference antenna port and the non-reference antenna port can be characterized by a coefficient ⁇ .
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between a reference antenna port in a four-port QHA unit and the other three non-reference antenna ports in the same antenna unit can also be characterized by coefficients ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , and ⁇ 3 respectively .
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between the other three non-reference antenna ports can also be characterized by coefficients.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between each of the three non-reference antenna ports can be characterized by ⁇ 4 , ⁇ 5 , and ⁇ 6 respectively .
  • the relationship between each coefficient and the port will be described in detail below in conjunction with specific embodiments, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the channel between any non-reference transmitting antenna port and a certain receiving antenna port and the channel between the reference transmitting antenna port and the same receiving antenna port can be correlated by the coefficient.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between the transmitting antenna port in the first polarization direction and the transmitting antenna port in the second polarization direction can be characterized by the coefficient ⁇
  • the port difference information can be obtained from the aforementioned coefficients.
  • the matrix formed by the above coefficients is obtained by mathematical transformation. Since the port difference information will be described below in conjunction with specific examples, a detailed description of the port difference information will be omitted for the time being.
  • the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device is a two-port antenna unit.
  • the number of receiving antenna ports configured by the receiving device is 1.
  • the following embodiment firstly uses a transmitting antenna unit as an example to illustrate the channel between a two-port antenna unit and one receiving antenna port, and then further illustrates the channel between multiple two-port antenna units and one receiving antenna port.
  • H H H of the channel H can be expressed as [h 1 h 2 ] H [h 1 h 2 ], and h 1 and h 2 can be correlated through the coefficient ⁇ , and we can get
  • H H H is denoted as R HH .
  • H H H and R HH are used interchangeably, and unless otherwise specified, the meanings expressed are the same.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , and ⁇ 4 are the radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit 1, the transmitting antenna unit 2, the transmitting antenna unit 3, and the transmitting antenna unit 4, respectively. difference.
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between each transmitting antenna unit and a receiving port can be expressed as similar to form.
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as For the transmitting antenna unit 2
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as For the transmitting antenna unit 3
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as For the transmitting antenna unit 4
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
  • the radiation characteristic differences among the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in multiple transmitting antenna units can be characterized by the same coefficient, or in other words, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units can be uniformly indicated, for example, by the same cell. . Therefore, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in a certain transmitting antenna unit can be applied to the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the radiation characteristic difference between port 1 and port 2 in transmitting antenna unit 1, the radiation characteristic difference between port 3 and port 4 in transmitting antenna unit 2, and the port in transmitting antenna unit 3 shown above are
  • the covariance of the channel between the transmitting antenna port and one receiving antenna port in the multiple transmitting antenna units can be expressed as:
  • the channel between each transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port does not necessarily have to be represented by the reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • the above-mentioned reference channel state information may be channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel corresponding to at least one of the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the radiation characteristic differences between the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar. That is, the radiation characteristic differences between the reference transmitting antenna and the non-reference transmitting antenna in the multiple transmitting antenna units are all characterized by the coefficient ⁇ . Different channels are still distinguished by different subscripts, such as h 1 , h 3 , h 5 and h 7 .
  • R AA is related to the reference transmission channel
  • R QQ is related to the radiation characteristics between ports.
  • the above-mentioned reference channel state information may be , for example, R AA or a result obtained by performing mathematical transformation on R AA.
  • the aforementioned port difference information may be , for example, R QQ , or a result obtained by performing mathematical transformation on R QQ.
  • channel H can be expressed as Further seeking the covariance matrix for this channel H, we can get If it passes the above To express, you can get:
  • R AA (H') H H'.
  • channel H can be expressed as:
  • R AA (H') H H'.
  • the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device is a four-port antenna unit.
  • the number of receiving antenna ports configured by the receiving device is 1.
  • the following embodiment first uses a transmitting antenna unit as an example to illustrate the channel between a four-port antenna unit and one receiving antenna port, and then further illustrates the channel between multiple four-port antenna units and one receiving antenna port.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between the three non-reference transmitting antenna ports and the reference transmitting antenna port among the four transmitting antenna ports can be characterized by the coefficients ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , and ⁇ 3 , and each non-reference transmitting antenna
  • the channel between the two transmitting antennas and the receiving antenna port in the above transmitting antenna unit can be expressed as h 1 [1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 3 ]. Therefore, the channel between the non-reference transmitting antenna port and the receiving port can also be represented by the reference transmission channel.
  • the reference transmission channel corresponding to port 1 is also used as the benchmark.
  • the coefficient ⁇ 4 used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 3 the coefficient ⁇ 5 used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 4
  • the coefficient ⁇ 6 of the difference in radiation characteristics can be understood as a value relative to the reference transmission channel corresponding to port 1.
  • the superscript of each coefficient indicates the antenna unit to which it belongs, and the subscript indicates the difference in radiation characteristics between the non-reference transmitting antenna port and the reference transmitting antenna port in the corresponding antenna unit.
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
  • the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
  • the radiation characteristic difference among the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in multiple transmitting antenna units can be characterized by the same coefficient.
  • the radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 2 in the transmitting antenna unit 1 and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 6 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 shown above can be represented by the same coefficient.
  • the radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 3 in the transmitting antenna unit 1, and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 7 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 can be represented by the same coefficient.
  • the radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 4 in the transmitting antenna unit 1, and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 8 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 can be represented by the same coefficient. which is,
  • the channel between each transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port does not necessarily have to be represented by the reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • the above-mentioned reference channel state information may be channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel corresponding to at least one of the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
  • the radiation characteristic differences between the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar. That is, the radiation characteristic differences between the reference transmitting antenna and the non-reference transmitting antenna in the multiple transmitting antenna units are all characterized by coefficients ⁇ 1 to ⁇ 6 . Different channels are still distinguished by different subscripts, such as h 1 , h 5 .
  • channel H can be expressed as: Further seeking the covariance matrix for this channel H, we can get Further derivation can be obtained:
  • R AA (H') H H'.
  • the terminal device may indicate the covariance matrix of the channel to the network device, so that the network device can restore the covariance matrix of the channel based on the instruction of the terminal device.
  • the indication of the covariance matrix of the channel by the terminal device may be based on the above formula, for example To indicate R AA and R QQ respectively .
  • the terminal device may also indicate the precoding matrix adapted to the channel to the network device, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix adapted to the signal based on the instruction of the terminal device.
  • the indication of the precoding matrix by the terminal device may be, for example, an indication of the precoding vector corresponding to each of the R transmission layers. For the rth transport layer in R transport layers, you can pass To indicate the corresponding precoding vector.
  • p r is the precoding vector corresponding to the r-th transmission layer
  • v r may be the r-th eigenvector among the R eigenvectors obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on R AA
  • q r may be the r-th eigenvector among the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R QQ.
  • R represents the maximum number of transmission layers, or in other words, the rank of the channel determined based on channel measurement.
  • v 1 to v R represent eigenvectors corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Rth transmission layer
  • a 1 to a R represent eigenvalues corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Rth transmission layer.
  • the R eigenvalues may be used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors (eg, eigenvectors, or precoding vectors) corresponding to the R transmission layers. Therefore, the R eigenvalues can be called R power coefficients.
  • the reference channel state information can be used to indicate information corresponding to R transport layers.
  • the remembered channel information can be used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transport layers.
  • the unitary matrix on the left side of the diagonal matrix and the unitary matrix on the right have the same conjugate transpose, that is, the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R AA It can be understood as a precoding vector corresponding to R transmission layers determined by the reference transmission channel H′. If the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on the R AA determined by the reference transmission channel are further combined with the port difference information described above, they can be used to determine the precoding vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers. Therefore, the indication of R AA described below can also be understood as a part of the indication of the precoding vector in a certain sense.
  • R AA v 1 a 1 v 1 * .
  • the precoding vector can be determined by the aforementioned feature vector v 1 and feature value a 1 .
  • the precoding vector may be determined by the aforementioned feature vectors v 1 , v 2 and feature values a 1 , a 2 . It can be seen from this that the indication of R AA and the indication of v r are essentially the same, and both are indications of the above R eigenvectors. Therefore, the indication of the reference channel state information by the terminal device may include the indication of the above-mentioned R feature vectors.
  • the R feature vectors may be indicated by way of port selection, for example.
  • each feature vector of the R feature vectors may be indicated by the index of a basis vector closest to it in the predefined basis vector set.
  • the r-th eigenvector among R eigenvectors can be indicated by the basis vector b r.
  • the terminal device indicates the basis vector b r , for example, it may indicate the index of the basis vector b r in the basis vector set.
  • the R eigenvectors may also be indicated by beam combining.
  • each of the R eigenvectors may be approximately characterized by the linear superposition and sum of one or more basis vectors in the predefined basis vector set.
  • the indication of the R feature vectors may be, for example, one or more selected basis vectors and their corresponding linear superposition coefficients in the basis vector set.
  • each feature vector in the R feature vectors may be indicated by the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set.
  • the vector in the basis vector set is denoted as b
  • the r-th eigenvector in R eigenvectors can be passed through L basis vectors to The linear superposition and sum to indicate.
  • the terminal device's indication of the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set may include an indication of the one or more basis vectors and an indication of the linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the one or more basis vectors.
  • the indication of one or more basis vectors can be indicated by the index of the one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set, or can indicate the one or more basis vectors.
  • the combination of the two basis vectors is indicated by the index in the basis vector set.
  • An indication of the linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the above one or more basis vectors such as the above to
  • the indication of can be indicated in a normalized manner, or indicated by a quantized value or an index of a quantized value, or a combination of the above two methods.
  • the indication of one or more linear superposition coefficients does not necessarily indicate each linear superposition coefficient.
  • the normalization method is used to indicate, it may only indicate the value of some of the linear superposition coefficients. , But the one or more linear superposition coefficients can still be determined based on the indicated information.
  • the reference channel state information can also be used to indicate the R eigenvalues corresponding to the above R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R AA.
  • the indication of the R feature values can be, for example, normalized, or can also be indicated by indicating the quantized value of each feature value or the index of the quantized value, or can also be a combination of the above two methods To indicate each coefficient, or to indicate each feature value in other prior art methods. This application does not limit this.
  • the eigenvalue can represent the power ratio between the eigenvectors of each transmission layer. Therefore, in this embodiment, the characteristic value is indicated in the reference channel state information, which can improve the feedback accuracy. For example, by indicating the characteristic value, the power ratio between the precoding vectors corresponding to each transmission layer is indicated, thereby improving the codebook feedback accuracy.
  • the terminal device's indication of the port difference information may be, for example, an indication of the aforementioned R QQ , or an indication of R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
  • the R QQ determined by the terminal device based on the covariance matrix of the channel H includes N(N-1)/2 coefficients. If SVD is performed on R QQ , R eigenvectors can be obtained, and each eigenvector includes N-1 coefficients.
  • the terminal device's indication of the port difference information may be an indication of R QQ, an indication of R eigenvectors, or an indication of the first eigenvector among them. This application does not limit this.
  • the indication of R QQ is combined with the indication of R AA described above to determine the covariance matrix of the channel.
  • the precoding vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers can be determined.
  • the indication of the first feature vector among the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ may be to apply the feature vector to the R transmission layers to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the R transmission layers.
  • the above indication of the R eigenvectors can be understood as indicating respectively q 1 to q R.
  • the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units may be different from each other. Therefore, the radiation difference characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit included in the port difference information can be represented by multiple R QQs similar to those described above.
  • the terminal device's indication of the port difference information may include an indication of multiple R QQ or multiple q r indications.
  • each group of q r may correspond to one transmitting antenna unit, and may include q 1 to q R.
  • the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units can also be the same in terms of radiation difference characteristics. Therefore, the radiation difference characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit included in the port difference information can be represented by the same R QQ .
  • the terminal device's indication of the port difference information may only include an indication of one R QQ or a group of q r .
  • the set of q r may include q 1 to q R.
  • each transmitting antenna unit includes N (N ⁇ 2 and an integer) transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics.
  • the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients in R QQ.
  • the indication of R QQ may include an indication of 6 coefficients.
  • the six coefficients can be used to represent: the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 2, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 3, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 4, and port 2 and port The difference in radiation characteristics among 3 relative to the value of port 1, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 4 relative to the value of port 1, and the difference in radiation characteristics between port 3 and port 4 relative to the value of port 1.
  • the port difference information includes an indication of the N-1 coefficient in each of the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
  • performing SVD on R QQ can obtain R feature vectors q 1 to q R.
  • Each feature vector includes N-1 coefficients.
  • the terminal device may indicate N-1 coefficients for each feature vector, so that the network device can determine the R feature vectors q 1 to q R.
  • the R feature vectors q 1 to q R can be combined with the R feature vectors v 1 to v R described above, respectively, to determine the precoding vectors p 1 to p R corresponding to the R transmission layers. As mentioned earlier, by The precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer can be determined.
  • the port difference information includes an indication of N-1 coefficients in one of the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
  • the terminal device may indicate the N-1 coefficients in a certain characteristic vector of the R characteristic vectors, so that the network device can determine the N-1 coefficients applicable to the R transmission layers.
  • the feature vectors used to determine the precoding vectors of the R transmission layers may be the same. That is, the terminal device can uniformly indicate the feature vectors q 1 to q R corresponding to the R transmission layers, for example, indicate a certain feature vector through the same cell.
  • the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer can be determined by the feature vector uniformly indicated by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may indicate N-1 coefficients in the first q 1 of the R feature vectors.
  • the feature vector q 1 determined by the network device from the N-1 coefficients can be combined with the R feature vectors v 1 to v R described above to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the R transmission layers.
  • p 1 to p R As mentioned earlier, by The precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer can be determined. In this embodiment, q r can be replaced with q 1 .
  • the terminal device may also indicate other feature vectors in the R feature vectors to the network device to apply to the R transport layers, which is not limited in this application.
  • the indication of a certain feature vector can be used to determine the precoding vector of any one of the R transmission layers. That is, this feature vector can be regarded as q 1 to q r corresponding to R transmission layers. Therefore, in a sense, the indication of the feature vector can also be understood as an indication of the R feature vectors from q 1 to q r.
  • the terminal equipment can indicate various coefficients in many ways.
  • the terminal device can indicate in a normalized manner, or the terminal device can indicate each coefficient by indicating the quantized value of each coefficient or the index of the quantized value, or it can also be a combination of the above two methods To indicate the coefficients, or to indicate the coefficients in other prior art methods. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can convert the channel state information into reference channel state information and port difference information for indication.
  • the covariance matrix of the channel may be indicated by the indication of R AA and the indication of R QQ , or the indication of v 1 to v R and the indication of q 1 to q R may be used .
  • the precoding vectors corresponding to R transport layers may be indicated by the indication of R AA and the indication of R QQ , or the indication of v 1 to v R and the indication of q 1 to q R may be used .
  • the reference transmit antenna port may be predefined.
  • the protocol can be predefined, or the network device and the terminal device can negotiate in advance the port number used as the reference transmitting antenna port in each antenna unit. This application does not limit how to determine the reference transmitting antenna port and the port number used as the reference transmitting antenna port.
  • each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port, N>1 and an integer.
  • the method further includes step 520.
  • the terminal device receives indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the value of N.
  • the network device sends instruction information, which is used to indicate the value of N.
  • N represents the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
  • the network device may, for example, carry the indication information through high-level signaling, and the high-level signaling may include, for example, an RRC message, MAC-CE, etc., to carry the indication information.
  • the network device may also carry the indication information through physical layer signaling, and the physical layer signaling may include, for example, DCI. This application does not limit the specific signaling used to carry the indication information.
  • the indication of the N value by the network device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication.
  • the network device may directly indicate the specific value of N; for another example, the network device may indirectly indicate the value of N by indicating the number of transmit antenna units and the total number of transmit ports. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device indicates the value of N.
  • step 530 the terminal device sends reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the network device receives reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the reference channel state information and the port difference information may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the reference channel state information and port difference information can be carried in the CSI report.
  • it may be the information in the PMI reported by the CSI.
  • the CSI report can be carried on the physical uplink resource and transmitted to the network device.
  • the physical uplink resource may be, for example, a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) resource. This application does not limit this.
  • step 540 the network device determines channel state information according to the reference state information and port difference information.
  • the specific process for the network device to obtain the reference channel state information and port difference information from the information received by the terminal device may correspond to the specific process for the terminal device to generate the reference channel state information and port difference information.
  • the two parties can pre-arrange the indication mode for the reference channel state information and the indication mode for the port difference information, and respectively generate and analyze the information based on the same method.
  • R AA , R QQ , R HH , v r , q r , p r, etc. determined by the network devices listed below based on the analysis of the reference state information and port difference information are the same as those of the terminal in step 510 above
  • R AA , R QQ , R HH , v r , q r , p r, etc. determined by the equipment are the same or close.
  • the former is determined based on the quantification and instructions of the latter. The closeness of the two depends largely on the quantization accuracy. Those skilled in the art can understand the difference.
  • the network device can obtain the R feature vectors determined by the reference channel state information R AA and N in the port difference information R QQ by analyzing the received information. (N-1)/2 coefficients; R feature vectors from v 1 to v R in the reference channel state information R AA and R from q 1 to q R determined by the port difference information R QQ can also be obtained Feature vector.
  • the network device may determine R AA according to the reference channel state information sent by the terminal device. It can be understood that the determination of R AA by the network device is equivalent to determining the R feature vectors from v 1 to v R in R AA.
  • R AA determined based on the R base vectors may satisfy the following formula:
  • R AA [b 1 ... b R ] H [b 1 ... b R ].
  • R AA determined based on the R basis vectors and R eigenvalues may satisfy the following formula:
  • the terminal device performs the linear superposition and linear superposition of one or more base vectors for each of the R feature vectors (as described above) to Based on the linear superposition and the determined R AA of one or more basis vectors indicated by each feature vector, the following formula can be satisfied:
  • the terminal device further indicates R eigenvalues (or power coefficients) corresponding to R eigenvectors, it is based on the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors indicated by each eigenvector and R R AA determined by the characteristic value can satisfy the following formula:
  • R AA formulas satisfied by R AA listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • R QQ can be determined in the N (N-1) / 2 coefficients, or may be determined according to the N-1 R QQ for SVD eigenvalues obtained. It depends on how the terminal device indicates R QQ.
  • the network device determines the N(N-1)/2 coefficients in R QQ according to the port difference information sent by the terminal device , It can be further determined that the channel state information is:
  • R HH may correspond to the covariance matrix H H H of channel H described in step 510 above.
  • the channel state information that the network device can determine based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information sent by the terminal device may be the covariance matrix of the channel.
  • the network device may further determine the precoding vector corresponding to each of the R transmission layers.
  • the covariance matrix of the channel is not limited to determining the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer. This application does not limit the operation after the network device determines the covariance matrix of the channel.
  • the network device determines the R eigenvectors q 1 to q R obtained by performing SVD on R QQ according to the port difference information sent by the terminal device, and the channel state information can be further determined as:
  • p r is a precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer determined by the network device based on the reference channel state information and port difference information indicated by the terminal device.
  • v r is the rth eigenvector among the R eigenvectors determined by the network device based on the reference channel state information indicated by the terminal device, which may correspond to the rth eigenvector obtained by performing SVD on R AA in step 510 above Feature vector.
  • q r is the rth eigenvector determined by the network device by performing SVD on the R QQ based on the terminal device's instruction.
  • q r can be the r-th eigenvector determined by SVD on R QQ , or a eigenvector determined by SVD on R QQ that is applicable to the precoding vectors of R transmission layers. . This application does not limit this.
  • the network device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information sent by the terminal device, which may be a precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer adapted to the channel.
  • the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the performance of the communication system.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in each embodiment. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations.
  • each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 may include a processing unit 610 and a transceiving unit 620.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 500 in FIG. 5.
  • the units in the communication device 600 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 500 in FIG. 5.
  • the processing unit 610 can be used to execute step 510 in the method 500
  • the transceiver unit 620 can be used to execute step 520 and step 530 in the method 500. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 610 in 600 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
  • the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented through an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. ).
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 500 in FIG. 5.
  • the units in the communication device 600 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 500 in FIG. 5.
  • the processing unit 610 can be used to execute step 540 in the method 500
  • the transceiver unit 620 can be used to execute step 520 and step 540 in the method 500. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG.
  • the processing unit 610 in 600 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9.
  • the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented through an input/output interface.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna device 700 includes a processor 710, a transceiver 720, and a memory 730.
  • the processor 710, the transceiver 720, and the memory 730 communicate with each other through an internal connection path.
  • the memory 730 is used to store instructions, and the processor 710 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 730 to control the transceiver 720 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
  • the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 730 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory.
  • the memory 730 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 710.
  • the processor 710 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 730, and when the processor 710 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 710 is configured to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
  • the aforementioned communication apparatus 700 is a communication device, such as the aforementioned network device or terminal device.
  • the transceiver 720 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 720 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the processor 710, the memory 730, and the transceiver 720 may be integrated on different chips.
  • the processor 710 and the memory 730 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 720 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip.
  • the processor 710, the memory 730, and the transceiver 720 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
  • the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports.
  • the communication device 700 When the communication device 700 is a terminal device, the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • the aforementioned communication device 700 is a component in a communication device (such as the aforementioned network device or terminal device), such as a chip.
  • the transceiver 720 in FIG. 7 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver 720, the processor 710 and the memory 720 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
  • the network device configured with the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports.
  • the terminal device configured with the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the reference channel state information and port difference information output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit 610 in FIG. 6 or the processor 710 in FIG. 7.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 620 in FIG. 6, or may also correspond to the transceiver 720 in FIG. 7.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100.
  • the audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station 3000.
  • the base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 3200.
  • RRU 3100 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 620 in FIG. 6 or corresponds to the transceiver 720 in FIG. 7.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals to baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, control of the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit. It may correspond to the processing unit 610 in FIG. 6 or the processor 710 in FIG. 7, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding. , Multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum and so on.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information, or to determine the channel state information.
  • the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 is only a possible architecture of the network device, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to network devices of other architectures.
  • network equipment including CU, DU, and AAU. This application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute a method executed by a terminal device or a network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as execution and completion by a hardware processor, or execution and completion by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 In the method.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the program shown in FIG. 5 The method executed by the terminal device or the network device in the embodiment.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments.
  • the processing unit executes the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
  • the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
  • a magnetic medium for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)
  • a semiconductor medium for example, a solid state disk, SSD
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a method for indicating and determining channel state information, and a communication device. The method is applicable to a system comprising a transmission apparatus and a receiving apparatus. The transmission apparatus comprises one or more transmission antenna units. Each transmission antenna unit comprises one reference transmission antenna port and at least one non-reference transmission antenna port. The receiving apparatus comprises one or more receiving antenna ports. Each reference transmission antenna port and one receiving antenna port constitute a reference transmission channel. The method comprises: a receiving apparatus generating and transmitting reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information being acquired on the basis of at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information being used to indicate a radiation characteristic difference between the reference transmission antenna port and the non-reference transmission antenna port in each transmission antenna unit; and a network apparatus determining channel state information according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.

Description

一种指示和确定信道状态信息的方法及通信装置Method and communication device for indicating and determining channel state information 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种指示和确定信道状态信息的方法及通信装置。This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a method and communication device for indicating and determining channel state information.
背景技术Background technique
为了获得较大的系统吞吐,希望通过对天线的设计,使得天线的空间分辨率达到最大。通常意义上,天线阵列的面积大小决定了天线阵列的空间分辨率。然而,天线面板的面积往往受限。为了提高系统吞吐,可以考虑在天线面板中部署可提供更多端口(比如,四端口,甚至更多端口)的天线单元。In order to obtain a larger system throughput, it is hoped that the antenna's spatial resolution can be maximized through the design of the antenna. Generally speaking, the area of the antenna array determines the spatial resolution of the antenna array. However, the area of the antenna panel is often limited. In order to improve system throughput, consider deploying antenna units that can provide more ports (for example, four ports, or even more ports) in the antenna panel.
然而,同一个天线单元所提供的多个端口可能具有不同的辐射特性。如何针对不同的辐射特性进行信道测量,以获取信道状态信息,是一项亟待解决的技术问题。However, multiple ports provided by the same antenna unit may have different radiation characteristics. How to perform channel measurement for different radiation characteristics to obtain channel state information is a technical problem to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种指示和确定信道状态信息的方法和通信装置,以适用于包含了具有多个不同辐射特性的发射天线端口的天线单元的发送设备。The present application provides a method and communication device for indicating and determining channel state information, so as to be applicable to a transmitting device including antenna units with multiple transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics.
第一方面,提供了一种指示信道状态信息的方法。该方法例如可以由接收设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在接收设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the first aspect, a method for indicating channel state information is provided. The method may be executed by, for example, a receiving device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the receiving device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法可应用于包括发送设备和接收设备的系统中。该发送设备可以包括一个或多个发射天线单元。每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口,每个发射天线单元的多个发射天线端口可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口。接收设备可以包括一个或多个接收天线端口。一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口可以构成一个基准传输信道。Specifically, the method can be applied to a system including a sending device and a receiving device. The transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units. Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. The receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports. A reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel.
该方法包括:生成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,该基准信道状态信息基于至少一个基准传输信道得到,该端口差异信息可用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;发送该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。The method includes: generating reference channel state information and port difference information, where the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate the reference transmit antenna port and the non-reference transmit antenna port in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the two; send the reference channel state information and port difference information.
其中,基准发射天线端口可以是预定义的。基准发射天线端口和非基准发射天线端口仅为便于区分而命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。一个发射天线单元中的任意一个天线端口都可以被定义为基准发射天线端口。本申请对于基准发射天线端口的定义方式不作限定。Among them, the reference transmitting antenna port may be predefined. The reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Any antenna port in a transmitting antenna unit can be defined as a reference transmitting antenna port. This application does not limit the definition of the reference transmitting antenna port.
在本申请实施例中,基准信道状态信息可以基于一个或多个基准传输信道得到,或者说,基准信道状态信息可以基于发送设备与终端设备之间的部分或全部的基准传输信道得到。端口差异信息可以包括与多个发射天线单元对应的、用于指示发射天线单元内各发射 天线端口之间的辐射特性差异的信息。与该多个发射天线单元对应的端口差异信息之间可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on one or more reference transmission channels, or in other words, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on part or all of the reference transmission channels between the sending device and the terminal device. The port difference information may include information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units and used to indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in the transmitting antenna unit. The port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
应理解,这里所述的接收设备具体可以是接收发送设备通过多个发射天线单元发送的信号(如参考信号)的设备。在一种可能的设计中,接收设备为终端设备,发送设备为网络设备。It should be understood that the receiving device described herein may specifically be a device that receives signals (such as reference signals) sent by the sending device through multiple transmitting antenna units. In one possible design, the receiving device is a terminal device and the sending device is a network device.
在本申请实施例中,通过对多天线发射天线单元定义基准发射天线端口和非基准天线端口,接收设备可以将信道状态信息转换成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息这两个部分来分别指示。一方面不会造成过大的指示开销,另一方面也能够保证一定的精度。如此一来,发送设备可以基于接收设备所指示的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息确定信道状态信息,进而为后续的数据传输进行合理的决策,例如确定与信道相适配的预编码矩阵等。因此,有利于可以提高通信系统的传输性能。In the embodiment of the present application, by defining the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference antenna port for the multi-antenna transmitting antenna unit, the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the communication system.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收指示信息,该指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N,可以理解为每个发射天线单元所提供的发射天线端口数,或者,每个发射天线单元所包括的发射天线端口数。The number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit can be understood as the number of transmitting antenna ports provided by each transmitting antenna unit, or the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
在每个发射天线单元定义了一个基准发射天线端口的情况下,非基准发射天线端口的数目与每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数相关。因此端口差异信息以及基准信道状态信息均与发射天线端口数相关。In the case that each transmitting antenna unit defines a reference transmitting antenna port, the number of non-reference transmitting antenna ports is related to the number of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit. Therefore, both the port difference information and the reference channel state information are related to the number of transmitting antenna ports.
应理解,发送设备对每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N的指示可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示。本申请对于N的具体指示方式不作限定。It should be understood that the indication of the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit by the transmitting device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. This application does not limit the specific instructions of N.
第二方面,提供了一种确定信道状态信息的方法。该方法例如可以由发送设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在发送设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)执行。本申请对此不作限定。In the second aspect, a method for determining channel state information is provided. The method may be executed by a sending device, or may also be executed by a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the sending device. This application does not limit this.
具体地,该方法可应用于指示发送设备和接收设备之间的信道状态信息。该发送设备可以包括一个或多个发射天线单元。每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口,每个发射天线单元的多个发射天线端口可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口。接收设备可以包括一个或多个接收天线端口。一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口可以构成一个基准传输信道。Specifically, the method can be applied to indicate channel state information between the sending device and the receiving device. The transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units. Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. The receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports. A reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel.
该方法包括:接收基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,该基准信道状态信息可用于指示基于至少一个基准传输信道得到的信道状态信息,该端口差异信息可用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;根据该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,确定信道状态信息。The method includes: receiving reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information may be used to indicate channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information may be used to indicate a reference transmit antenna in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port; the channel state information is determined according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
其中,基准发射天线端口可以是预定义的。基准发射天线端口和非基准发射天线端口仅为便于区分而命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。一个发射天线单元中的任意一个天线端口都可以被定义为基准发射天线端口。本申请对于基准发射天线端口的定义方式不作限定。Among them, the reference transmitting antenna port may be predefined. The reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Any antenna port in a transmitting antenna unit can be defined as a reference transmitting antenna port. This application does not limit the definition of the reference transmitting antenna port.
在本申请实施例中,基准信道状态信息可以基于一个或多个基准传输信道得到,或者说,基准信道状态信息可以基于发送设备与终端设备之间的部分或全部的基准传输信道得到。端口差异信息可以包括与多个发射天线单元对应的、用于指示发射天线单元内各发射 天线端口之间的辐射特性差异的信息。与该多个发射天线单元对应的端口差异信息之间可以相同,也可以不同,本申请对此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on one or more reference transmission channels, or in other words, the reference channel state information may be obtained based on part or all of the reference transmission channels between the sending device and the terminal device. The port difference information may include information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units and used to indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in the transmitting antenna unit. The port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
应理解,这里所述的接收设备具体可以是接收来自发送设备通过多个发射天线单元发送的信号(如参考信号)的设备。在一种可能的设计中,接收设备为终端设备,发送设备为网络设备。It should be understood that the receiving device described here may specifically be a device that receives signals (such as reference signals) sent from the sending device through multiple transmitting antenna units. In one possible design, the receiving device is a terminal device and the sending device is a network device.
在本申请实施例中,通过对多天线发射天线单元定义基准发射天线端口和非基准天线端口,接收设备可以将信道状态信息转换成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息这两个部分来分别指示。一方面不会造成过大的指示开销,另一方面也能够保证一定的精度。如此一来,发送设备可以基于接收设备所指示的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息确定信道状态信息,进而为后续的数据传输进行合理的决策,例如确定与信道相适配的预编码矩阵等。因此,有利于可以提高通信系统的传输性能。In the embodiment of the present application, by defining the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference antenna port for the multi-antenna transmitting antenna unit, the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the communication system.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: sending instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N,可以理解为每个发射天线单元所提供的发射天线端口数,或者,每个发射天线单元所包括的发射天线端口数。The number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit can be understood as the number of transmitting antenna ports provided by each transmitting antenna unit, or the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
在每个发射天线单元定义了一个基准发射天线端口的情况下,非基准发射天线端口的数目与每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数相关。因此端口差异信息以及基准信道状态信息均与发射天线端口数相关。In the case that each transmitting antenna unit defines a reference transmitting antenna port, the number of non-reference transmitting antenna ports is related to the number of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit. Therefore, both the port difference information and the reference channel state information are related to the number of transmitting antenna ports.
应理解,发送设备对每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N的指示可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示。本申请对于N的具体指示方式不作限定。It should be understood that the indication of the number N of transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit by the transmitting device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. This application does not limit the specific instructions of N.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是接收设备,或接收设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面以及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a receiving device or a component in the receiving device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
具体地,该通信装置可应用于包括接收设备和发送设备的系统中。该发送设备可以包括一个或多个发射天线单元。每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口,每个发射天线单元的多个发射天线端口可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口。接收设备可以包括一个或多个接收天线端口。一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口可以构成一个基准传输信道。可以理解的是,若该通信装置为接收设备,则这里所述的接收设备可以替换为该通信装置。Specifically, the communication device can be applied to a system including a receiving device and a transmitting device. The transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units. Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. The receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports. A reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel. It is understandable that if the communication device is a receiving device, the receiving device described here can be replaced with the communication device.
该通信装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元。其中,处理单元可用于生成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,该基准信道状态信息基于至少一个基准传输信道得到,该端口差异信息可用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;收发单元可用于发送该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。The communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit. Wherein, the processing unit can be used to generate reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate whether the reference transmission antenna port in each transmission antenna unit is different from the non-reference transmission. The difference in radiation characteristics between antenna ports; the transceiver unit can be used to send the reference channel state information and port difference information.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收指示信息,该指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the transceiver unit is further used to receive indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是发送设备,或发送设备中的部件。该通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be a sending device or a component in the sending device. The communication device may include various modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
具体地,该通信装置可应用于包括接收设备和发送设备的系统中。该发送设备可以包 括一个或多个发射天线单元。每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口,每个发射天线单元的多个发射天线端口可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口。接收设备可以包括一个或多个接收天线端口。一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口可以构成一个基准传输信道。可以理解的是,若该通信装置为发送设备,则这里所述的发送设备可以替换为该通信装置。Specifically, the communication device can be applied to a system including a receiving device and a transmitting device. The transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units. Each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports, and the multiple transmitting antenna ports of each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. The receiving device may include one or more receiving antenna ports. A reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can form a reference transmission channel. It is understandable that if the communication device is a sending device, the sending device described here can be replaced with the communication device.
该通信装置可以包括处理单元和收发单元。其中,收发单元可用于接收基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,该基准信道状态信息基于至少一个基准传输信道得到,该端口差异信息可用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;该处理单元可用于根据该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,确定信道状态信息。The communication device may include a processing unit and a transceiving unit. Among them, the transceiver unit can be used to receive reference channel state information and port difference information, the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information can be used to indicate the reference transmit antenna port and non-reference transmission in each transmit antenna unit The radiation characteristic difference between the antenna ports; the processing unit can be used to determine the channel state information according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the transceiver unit is also used to send instruction information, and the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面以及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为接收设备。当该通信装置为接收设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a receiving device. When the communication device is a receiving device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
此外,该通信装置可以配置有一个或多个接收天线端口。In addition, the communication device may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于接收设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于接收设备中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。此外,该通信装置所属的通信设备可以配置有一个或多个接收天线端口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in the receiving device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a receiving device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface. In addition, the communication device to which the communication device belongs may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
可选地,该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
此外,配置了该通信装置的通信设备可以配置有一个或多个接收天线端口。In addition, the communication device equipped with the communication device may be equipped with one or more receiving antenna ports.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为发送设备。当该通信装置为发送设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a sending device. When the communication device is a transmitting device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
此外,该通信装置可以配置有一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元包括多个发射天线端口。In addition, the communication device may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes a plurality of transmitting antenna ports.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于发送设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于发送设备中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in the sending device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a sending device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
此外,配置了该通信装置的通信设备可以配置有一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元包括多个发射天线端口。In addition, the communication device equipped with the communication device may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes a plurality of transmitting antenna ports.
第七方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行 第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect. The method in the way.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为一个或多个芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips, the input circuit can be an input pin, the output circuit can be an output pin, and the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc. . The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to the transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第八方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and any one of the first aspect to the second aspect. In the method.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息可以为向处理器输入基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的过程。具体地,处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related data interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving reference channel state information and port difference information may be a process of inputting reference channel state information and port difference information to the processor. Specifically, the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第八方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。该处理装置中的处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个或多个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The processing device in the above eighth aspect may be one or more chips. The processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be one or more general-purpose processors, which are implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, The memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect above. The method in the second aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的接收设备和发送设备。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned receiving device and sending device.
结合上述各方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,接收设备可以是终端设备,发送设备可以是网络设备。In combination with the foregoing aspects, in some possible implementation manners, the receiving device may be a terminal device, and the sending device may be a network device.
结合上述各方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口。In combination with the foregoing aspects, in some possible implementation manners, each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports.
可选地,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括与R个传输层中的每个传输层对应的R组系数的指示,每组系数包括N-1个系数,R≥1,N>1, R、N为整数。Optionally, each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, the port difference information includes an indication of R sets of coefficients corresponding to each of the R transmission layers, and each set of coefficients includes N-1 coefficients , R≥1, N>1, R and N are integers.
该N-1个系数具体可用于表示每个发射天线单元内的基准发射天线端口与N-1个非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异。The N-1 coefficients can be specifically used to represent the difference in radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the N-1 non-reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit.
可以看到,该端口差异信息所指示的每组系数可对应于一个传输层。每组系数可用于确定所对应的传输层的预编码向量。It can be seen that each set of coefficients indicated by the port difference information can correspond to a transport layer. Each set of coefficients can be used to determine the corresponding precoding vector of the transmission layer.
可选地,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括对N(N-1)/2个系数的指示,N>1且为整数。Optionally, each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients, where N>1 and an integer.
该N(N-1)/2个系数除了用于表示每个发射天线单元内的基准发射天线端口与N-1个非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异之外,还用于表示每个发射天线单元内N-1个非基准发射天线中每两个非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异。The N(N-1)/2 coefficients are used to express the difference in radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and N-1 non-reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit, and also to express each The radiation characteristic difference between every two non-reference transmitting antenna ports in the N-1 non-reference transmitting antennas in each transmitting antenna unit.
可以看到,与前文所述的N-1个系数不同,该端口差异信息所指示的N(N-1)/2个系数并不与传输层对应。事实上,该N(N-1)/2个系数可用于确定信道的协方差矩阵。It can be seen that, unlike the N-1 coefficients described above, the N(N-1)/2 coefficients indicated by the port difference information do not correspond to the transmission layer. In fact, the N(N-1)/2 coefficients can be used to determine the covariance matrix of the channel.
应理解,通过系数来指示端口辐射特性差异仅为一种可能的实现方式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the use of coefficients to indicate the difference in port radiation characteristics is only a possible implementation, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
结合上述各方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该多个发射天线单元的端口差异信息相同。In combination with the foregoing aspects, in some possible implementation manners, the port difference information of the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same.
如前所述,与该多个发射天线单元对应的端口差异信息之间可以相同,也可以不同。因此,各发射天线单元中的发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以通过相同的信息来表示,也可以通过不同的信息来表示。在一种可能的设计中,多个发射天线单元中的基准发射天线端口可以具有相同或相似(或者说,相接近)的辐射特性,例如,各发射天线单元中的基准发射天线端口可以是在各发射天线单元中所处的位置相同。此情况下,各发射天线单元中的发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以是相同的。接收设备对端口差异信息的指示可以仅包括一个发射天线单元中的发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异的指示,或者说,可以仅指示一个发射天线单元中的发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异,或者说,各发射天线单元中的发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以通过同一端口差异信息来指示。As mentioned above, the port difference information corresponding to the multiple transmitting antenna units may be the same or different. Therefore, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit can be represented by the same information, or can be represented by different information. In a possible design, the reference transmitting antenna ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units may have the same or similar (or close) radiation characteristics. For example, the reference transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit may be The positions of the transmitting antenna units are the same. In this case, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit may be the same. The indication of the port difference information by the receiving device may only include an indication of the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in one transmitting antenna unit, or in other words, it may only indicate the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in one transmitting antenna unit Or, in other words, the radiation characteristic difference between the transmitting antenna ports in each transmitting antenna unit can be indicated by the same port difference information.
结合上述各方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该基准信道状态信息具体用于指示对应于R个传输层的R个向量,R为正整数。In combination with the foregoing aspects, in some possible implementation manners, the reference channel state information is specifically used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transmission layers, and R is a positive integer.
该基准信道状态信息可以基于多个基准传输信道的协方差矩阵确定。示例性地,对多个基准传输信道的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解可以得到R个特征向量,该R个特征向量可以与R个传输层对应。The reference channel state information may be determined based on the covariance matrices of multiple reference transmission channels. Exemplarily, performing singular value decomposition on the covariance matrices of multiple reference transmission channels may obtain R eigenvectors, and the R eigenvectors may correspond to R transmission layers.
其中,接收设备可以将发送设备与接收设备之间的多个基准传输信道通过一个基准传输信道或一个基准传输信道的数学变换来表示,例如两个基准传输信道之间的差异可以通过系数来表示。接收设备也可以对发送设备与接收设备之间的多个基准传输信道的信道状态信息分别指示。本申请对此不作限定。Among them, the receiving device can represent multiple reference transmission channels between the sending device and the receiving device through a reference transmission channel or a mathematical transformation of a reference transmission channel. For example, the difference between two reference transmission channels can be represented by a coefficient. . The receiving device may also separately indicate the channel state information of multiple reference transmission channels between the sending device and the receiving device. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该R个向量中的第r个向量用于确定对应于该R个传输层中的第r个传输层的预编码向量,1≤r≤R,r为正整数。Optionally, the rth vector in the R vectors is used to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer in the R transmission layers, and 1≤r≤R, and r is a positive integer.
该R个向量与上述端口差异信息结合,可用于确定分别对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。但应理解,发送设备基于基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息所确定的信道状态信息并不限于预编码向量,还可以是信道、信道的协方差矩阵等。本申请对此不作限定。The R vectors are combined with the aforementioned port difference information and can be used to determine the precoding vectors respectively corresponding to the R transmission layers. However, it should be understood that the channel state information determined by the transmitting device based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information is not limited to the precoding vector, and may also be a channel, a covariance matrix of the channel, and the like. This application does not limit this.
可选地,该R个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的R个基底向量,该基准信道状态信息包括对该基底向量集合中的该R个基底向量的指示。Optionally, the R vectors are R basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set, and the reference channel state information includes an indication of the R basis vectors in the basis vector set.
即,接收设备可以通过端口选择(port selection)的方式来指示该R个向量。That is, the receiving device can indicate the R vectors through port selection.
可选地,该R个向量中的每个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和,该基准信道状态信息包括对该R个向量中每个向量对应的一个或多个基底向量及其线性叠加系数的指示。Optionally, each of the R vectors is a linear superposition sum of one or more base vectors in a predefined set of base vectors, and the reference channel state information includes the corresponding information to each of the R vectors. An indication of one or more basis vectors and their linear superposition coefficients.
即,接收设备可以通过波束线性叠加(linear combine)的方式来指示该R个向量。That is, the receiving device can indicate the R vectors in a linear combination of beams.
进一步地,该基准信道状态信息还用于指示至少一个功率系数,该至少一个功率系数用于指示各传输层对应的向量之间的功率比例。Further, the reference channel state information is also used to indicate at least one power coefficient, and the at least one power coefficient is used to indicate a power ratio between vectors corresponding to each transmission layer.
即,接收设备还可进一步将上述SVD得到的R个特征向量分别对应的R个特征值指示给发送设备。该R个特征值可以表示所对应的R个特征向量之间的功率比例。因此在本申请中将该R个特征值定义为可用于指示R个传输层对应的向量之间的功率比例的信息。此外,接收设备对该R个特征值的指示方式不作限定。例如,采用归一化的方式来指示等。That is, the receiving device may further indicate the R characteristic values corresponding to the R characteristic vectors obtained by the above SVD to the sending device. The R eigenvalues can represent the power ratio between the corresponding R eigenvectors. Therefore, in this application, the R eigenvalues are defined as information that can be used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers. In addition, the receiving device does not limit the way of indicating the R characteristic values. For example, use a normalized way to indicate and so on.
相比于前文所述的基于R个特征向量和端口差异信息所确定的信道状态信息而言,进一步结合R个特征值所确定的信道状态信息更加精准,更有利于提高系统传输性能。Compared with the aforementioned channel state information determined based on the R eigenvectors and port difference information, the channel state information determined by further combining the R eigenvalues is more accurate, and is more conducive to improving system transmission performance.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to the method for indicating and determining channel state information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的双极化方向天线单元的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a dual polarization direction antenna unit provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的四端口QHA单元的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a four-port QHA unit provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的发送设备与接收设备之间的信道的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a channel between a sending device and a receiving device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的示意性流程图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of indicating and determining channel state information provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的另一通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。Fig. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5 th Generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio Access Technology,NR)或者下一代通信,比如6G。其中,5G移动通信系统可以是非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)或独立组网(standalone,SA)。 Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide Interoperability for microwave access (worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX ) communication system, the fifth generation (5 th Generation, 5G) mobile communication system or a new radio access technology (new radio access technology, NR) or next generation communication, such as 6G. Among them, the 5G mobile communication system can be non-standalone (NSA) or standalone (SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、机器间通信长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution-machine,LTE-M)、设备到设备(device–to device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物 联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式统称为车到其他设备(vehicle to X,V2X,X可以代表任何事物),例如,该V2X可以包括:车辆到车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to machine type communication (MTC), inter-machine communication long-term evolution technology (Long Term Evolution-machine, LTE-M), and device-to-device (D2D) Network, machine to machine (M2M) network, Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks. Among them, the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as vehicle to other devices (vehicle to X, V2X, X can represent anything), for example, the V2X may include: vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, and the Infrastructure (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) communication, vehicle to pedestrian communication (V2P) or vehicle to network (V2N) communication, etc.
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代(6 th Generation,6G)移动通信系统等。本申请对此不作限定。 The technical solution provided herein can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation (6 th Generation, 6G), mobile communication systems. This application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),或者下一代通信6G系统中的基站等。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may be any device that has a wireless transceiver function. This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system Access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP), or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR , The gNB in the system, or the transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, Such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), or a base station in the next-generation communication 6G system.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU和AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements part of the functions of gNB, and the DU implements part of the functions of gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU and AAU. It is understandable that the network device may be a device including one or more of the CU node, the DU node, and the AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
网络设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过网络设备分配的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与小区进行通信,该小区可以属于宏基站(例如,宏eNB或宏gNB等),也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The network equipment provides services for the cell, and the terminal equipment communicates with the cell through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) allocated by the network equipment, and the cell may belong to a macro base station (for example, a macro eNB or a macro gNB, etc.) , It can also belong to the base station corresponding to the small cell. The small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, femto cell, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage area and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-speed data transmission services.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。In the embodiments of the present application, terminal equipment may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, Terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例可以为:手机(mobile phone)、平 板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑(如笔记本电脑、掌上电脑等)、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets (pads), computers with wireless transceiver functions (such as laptops, palmtop computers, etc.), mobile Internet devices (mobile internet devices, MID), virtual reality Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), and wireless in remote medical (remote medical) Terminals, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless Telephone, session initiation protocol (SIP) telephone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or connection Other processing equipment to wireless modems, in-vehicle equipment, wearable equipment, terminal equipment in the 5G network, or terminal equipment in the public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future.
其中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。Among them, wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,终端设备还可以是物联网(Internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备。IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, so as to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things. IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power-saving terminals through, for example, narrowband NB technology.
此外,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, terminal devices can also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc. The main functions include collecting data (some terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data from network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves to transmit uplink data to network devices. .
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信系统。图1示出了适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,如图1中所示的5G系统中的网络设备101;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,如图1中所示的终端设备102至107。其中,该终端设备102至107可以是移动的或固定的。网络设备101和终端设备102至107中的一个或多个均可以通过无线链路通信。每个网络设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备通信。例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送配置信息,终端设备可以基于该配置信息向网络设备发送上行数据;又例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送下行数据。因此,图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107构成一个通信系统。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system suitable for the method provided in the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 101 in the 5G system shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, as shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 102 to 107. Wherein, the terminal devices 102 to 107 may be mobile or fixed. The network device 101 and one or more of the terminal devices 102 to 107 can communicate through a wireless link. Each network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographic area, and can communicate with terminal devices located in the coverage area. For example, the network device may send configuration information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send uplink data to the network device based on the configuration information; for another example, the network device may send downlink data to the terminal device. Therefore, the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1 constitute a communication system.
可选地,终端设备之间可以直接通信。例如可以利用D2D技术等实现终端设备之间的直接通信。如图中所示,终端设备105与106之间、终端设备105与107之间,可以利用D2D技术直接通信。终端设备106和终端设备107可以单独或同时与终端设备105通信。Optionally, the terminal devices can communicate directly. For example, D2D technology can be used to realize direct communication between terminal devices. As shown in the figure, between terminal devices 105 and 106, and between terminal devices 105 and 107, D2D technology can be used for direct communication. The terminal device 106 and the terminal device 107 may communicate with the terminal device 105 individually or at the same time.
终端设备105至107也可以分别与网络设备101通信。例如可以直接与网络设备101 通信,如图中的终端设备105和106可以直接与网络设备101通信;也可以间接地与网络设备101通信,如图中的终端设备107经由终端设备106与网络设备101通信。The terminal devices 105 to 107 may also communicate with the network device 101, respectively. For example, it can directly communicate with the network device 101, as shown in the figure, the terminal devices 105 and 106 can directly communicate with the network device 101; it can also communicate with the network device 101 indirectly, as the terminal device 107 in the figure communicates with the network device via the terminal device 106 101 communication.
应理解,图1示例性地示出了一个网络设备和多个终端设备,以及各通信设备之间的通信链路。可选地,该通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备,并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,例如更多或更少的终端设备。本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a network device, multiple terminal devices, and communication links between each communication device. Optionally, the communication system 100 may include multiple network devices, and the coverage of each network device may include other numbers of terminal devices, for example, more or fewer terminal devices. This application does not limit this.
上述各个通信设备,如图1中的网络设备101和终端设备102至107,可以配置多个天线。该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外,各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此,网络设备与终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。Each of the aforementioned communication devices, such as the network device 101 and the terminal devices 102 to 107 in FIG. 1, may be configured with multiple antennas. The plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. In addition, each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers, etc.). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
可选地,该无线通信系统100还可以包括网络控制器、移动管理实体等其他网络实体,本申请实施例不限于此。Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may also include other network entities such as a network controller and a mobility management entity, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面简单说明下行信号在发送之前在物理层的处理过程。应理解,下文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的部件(如芯片或芯片系统等)执行。为方便说明,下文统称为网络设备。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly describes the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission. It should be understood that the processing of the downlink signal described below may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a component (such as a chip or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
网络设备在物理信道可对码字(code word)进行处理。其中,码字可以为经过编码(例如包括信道编码)的编码比特。码字经过加扰(scrambling),生成加扰比特。加扰比特经过调制映射(modulation mapping),得到调制符号。调制符号经过层映射(layer mapping),被映射到多个层(layer),或者称传输层。经过层映射后的调制符号经过预编码(precoding),得到预编码后的信号。预编码后的信号经过资源元素(resource element,RE)映射后,被映射到多个RE上。这些RE随后经过正交复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)调制后通过天线端口(antenna port)发射出去。Network equipment can process code words on physical channels. Wherein, the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding). The codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits. The scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols. Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, after layer mapping. The modulation symbols after the layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal. The precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
应理解,上文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程仅为示例性描述,不应对本申请构成任何限定。对下行信号的处理过程具体可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the processing procedure for the downlink signal described above is only an exemplary description, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the processing of the downlink signal, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
为便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请实施例中涉及到的术语做简单介绍。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly introduces the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application.
1、天线端口(antenna port):可简称端口。天线端口可以包括发射天线端口(或者称,发射天线端口)和接收天线端口。在本申请实施例中,发射天线端口可以是指发送设备的发射天线端口。接收天线端口可以是指接收设备的接收天线端口。1. Antenna port: It can be abbreviated as a port. The antenna port may include a transmitting antenna port (or called a transmitting antenna port) and a receiving antenna port. In the embodiment of the present application, the transmitting antenna port may refer to the transmitting antenna port of the transmitting device. The receiving antenna port may refer to the receiving antenna port of the receiving device.
其中,发射天线端口可以理解为被接收设备所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。例如在下行传输中,发射天线端口可以是指网络设备的发射天线端口。Among them, the transmitting antenna port can be understood as the transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or the transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space. For example, in downlink transmission, the transmitting antenna port may refer to the transmitting antenna port of the network device.
接收天线端口可以理解为接收设备的接收天线。例如在下行传输中,接收端口可以是指终端设备的接收天线。The receiving antenna port can be understood as the receiving antenna of the receiving device. For example, in downlink transmission, the receiving port may refer to the receiving antenna of the terminal device.
2、辐射特性:辐射特性具体可以是指天线辐射的方向特性。将天线远区辐射场的相对场强(例如包括幅度和相位)与方向间的关系用曲线表示,则可以得到天线的辐射方向图。在本申请实施例中,由于天线单元的各发射天线端口间具有彼此互不相同的辐射特性,故各发射天线端口的辐射方向特性不同。各发射天线端口各自对应的辐射方向图也彼此互不相同。2. Radiation characteristics: The radiation characteristics can specifically refer to the directional characteristics of the antenna radiation. The relationship between the relative field strength (for example, amplitude and phase) and the direction of the radiation field in the far area of the antenna is represented by a curve, and the radiation pattern of the antenna can be obtained. In the embodiment of the present application, since each transmitting antenna port of the antenna unit has radiation characteristics that are different from each other, the radiation direction characteristics of each transmitting antenna port are different. The radiation patterns corresponding to the transmitting antenna ports are also different from each other.
3、天线单元:在多天线技术中,发送设备(比如网络设备)通常配置有大规模的天 线阵列。天线阵列中可以包括一个或多个天线单元。各天线单元之间可以是相互独立的。3. Antenna unit: In multi-antenna technology, transmitting equipment (such as network equipment) is usually equipped with a large-scale antenna array. The antenna array may include one or more antenna elements. Each antenna unit can be independent of each other.
在本申请实施例中,每个天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口。且,每个天线单元所包括的多个发射天线端口之间的辐射特性彼此互不相同。In the embodiment of the present application, each antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports. Moreover, the radiation characteristics of the multiple transmitting antenna ports included in each antenna unit are different from each other.
举例而言,该天线单元可以是二端口天线单元。每个二端口天线单元可以包括两个发射天线端口,且该两个发射天线端口具有的辐射特性不同。作为示例而非限定,该二端口天线单元比如可以是双极化方向天线单元。所谓极化方向,就是指天线辐射时形成的电场振荡方向。因此,极化可以理解为是辐射特性的一种表现。双极化方向天线单元可以包括第一极化方向的发射天线端口和第二极化方向的发射天线端口。第一极化方向和第二极化方向可以是两个不同的极化方向。也就是说,双极化方向天线单元所提供的发射天线端口时不同极化方向的两个发射天线端口。作为示例而非限定,第一极化方向例如可以是水平极化方向,第二极化方向例如可以是垂直极化方向;第一极化方向例如也可以是+45°方向,第二极化方向例如也可以是-45°方向。本申请对此不作限定。For example, the antenna unit may be a two-port antenna unit. Each two-port antenna unit may include two transmitting antenna ports, and the two transmitting antenna ports have different radiation characteristics. As an example and not a limitation, the two-port antenna unit may be, for example, a dual polarization direction antenna unit. The so-called polarization direction refers to the direction of electric field oscillation formed when the antenna radiates. Therefore, polarization can be understood as a manifestation of radiation characteristics. The dual polarization direction antenna unit may include a transmitting antenna port in a first polarization direction and a transmitting antenna port in a second polarization direction. The first polarization direction and the second polarization direction may be two different polarization directions. That is to say, the transmitting antenna ports provided by the dual polarization direction antenna unit are two transmitting antenna ports with different polarization directions. As an example and not a limitation, the first polarization direction may be, for example, the horizontal polarization direction, and the second polarization direction may be, for example, the vertical polarization direction; the first polarization direction may also be, for example, the +45° direction, and the second polarization direction may be the +45° direction. The direction may also be a -45° direction, for example. This application does not limit this.
图2是本申请实施例提供的双极化方向天线单元的一例。如图所示,图2示出了4个双极化天线单元,其中,不考虑天线阵列中各天线单元之间的耦合,端口1、端口3、端口5、端口7为第一极化方向的发射天线端口,端口2、端口4、端口6、端口8为第二极化方向的发射天线端口。也就是说,端口1、端口3、端口5、端口7具有相同的极化方向,或者说,具有相同的辐射特性。端口2、端口4、端口6、端口8具有相同的极化方向,或者说,具有相同的辐射特性。Fig. 2 is an example of a dual polarization direction antenna unit provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, Figure 2 shows 4 dual-polarized antenna elements, where, regardless of the coupling between the antenna elements in the antenna array, port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 are the first polarization directions Port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 are the transmitting antenna ports of the second polarization direction. In other words, port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 have the same polarization direction, or in other words, have the same radiation characteristics. Port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 have the same polarization direction, or in other words, have the same radiation characteristics.
再例如,该天线单元可以是四端口天线单元。每个四端口天线单元可以包含四个发射天线端口,且该四个发射天线端口具有的辐射特性彼此互不相同。作为示例而非限定,该四端口天线单元比如可以是每个螺旋臂单独驱动的四臂螺旋天线(quadrifilar helix antenna,QHA)单元(下文简称四端口QHA单元)。For another example, the antenna unit may be a four-port antenna unit. Each four-port antenna unit may include four transmitting antenna ports, and the radiation characteristics of the four transmitting antenna ports are different from each other. As an example and not a limitation, the four-port antenna unit may be, for example, a quadrifilar helix antenna (QHA) unit (hereinafter referred to as a four-port QHA unit) independently driven by each spiral arm.
图3是本申请实施例提供的四端口QHA单元的一例。如图所示,图3示出了2个四端口QHA单元,其中,不考虑天线阵列中各天线单元之间的耦合,端口1和5具有相同的辐射特性,端口2和6具有相同的辐射特性,端口3和7具有相同的辐射特性,端口4和8具有相同的辐射特性。Fig. 3 is an example of a four-port QHA unit provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, Figure 3 shows two four-port QHA units, in which, regardless of the coupling between the antenna elements in the antenna array, ports 1 and 5 have the same radiation characteristics, and ports 2 and 6 have the same radiation Characteristics, ports 3 and 7 have the same radiation characteristics, and ports 4 and 8 have the same radiation characteristics.
应理解,上文中仅为便于理解,分别示出了二端口天线单元和四端口天线单元的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于每个天线单元所包含的发射天线端口的具体数量以及辐射特性不作限定,本申请对于天线单元的具体类型也不做限定。It should be understood that the foregoing is only for ease of understanding, and an example of a two-port antenna unit and a four-port antenna unit are respectively shown. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific number and radiation characteristics of the transmitting antenna ports included in each antenna unit, and this application does not limit the specific type of antenna unit.
还应理解,图2和图3所示的天线单元的排布仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,图2所示的二端口天线单元的排布可以是一行四列,也可以是两行两列,还可以是一列四行。又例如,图3所示的四端口天线单元的排布可以是一行两列,也可以是两行一列。本申请对此不作限定。It should also be understood that the arrangement of the antenna units shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. For example, the arrangement of the two-port antenna unit shown in FIG. 2 may be one row and four columns, two rows and two columns, or one column and four rows. For another example, the arrangement of the four-port antenna unit shown in FIG. 3 may be one row and two columns, or two rows and one column. This application does not limit this.
4、信道矩阵:在多天线技术中,发送设备和接收设备之间的信道矩阵的维度可以由接收设备的接收天线端口数和发送设备的发射天线端口数决定。假设接收设备的接收天线端口数为R,发送设备的发射天线端口数为T,则信道矩阵可以是维度为R×T的矩阵。该矩阵中的每个元素可以表示一个发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口之间的信道信息。4. Channel matrix: In the multi-antenna technology, the dimension of the channel matrix between the transmitting device and the receiving device can be determined by the number of receiving antenna ports of the receiving device and the number of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device. Assuming that the number of receiving antenna ports of the receiving device is R and the number of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device is T, the channel matrix may be a matrix with a dimension of R×T. Each element in the matrix can represent channel information between a transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port.
图4示出了发送设备和接收设备之间的信道的示意图。如图所示,该发送设备的发射天线端口数T为4,该接收设备的接收天线端口数R为2。若用h来表示一个发射天线端 口和一个接收天线端口之间的信道,则h 11、h 12、h 13、h 14可以分别表示发射天线端口中的端口1、端口2、端口3、端口4与接收天线端口中的端口1之间的信道,h 21、h 22、h 23、h 24可以分别表示发射天线端口中的端口1、端口2、端口3、端口4与接收天线端口中的端口2之间的信道。由此可以构造信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000001
其中,各信道的下角标的前一位与接收天线端口对应,后一位与发射天线端口对应。
Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of a channel between a sending device and a receiving device. As shown in the figure, the number T of transmitting antenna ports of the transmitting device is 4, and the number of receiving antenna ports R of the receiving device is 2. If h is used to represent the channel between a transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port, h 11 , h 12 , h 13 , and h 14 can respectively represent port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4 of the transmitting antenna port The channel between the port 1 and the receiving antenna port, h 21 , h 22 , h 23 , and h 24 can respectively represent the port 1, port 2, port 3, port 4 of the transmitting antenna port and the port of the receiving antenna port The channel between 2. From this, the channel matrix can be constructed
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000001
Among them, the first bit of the subscript of each channel corresponds to the receiving antenna port, and the last bit corresponds to the transmitting antenna port.
应理解,上文仅为便于对后文实施例的理解,对信道矩阵进行了详细说明。本申请对于发射天线端口、接收天线端口以及信道矩阵的维度均不作限定。It should be understood that the above is only to facilitate the understanding of the following embodiments, and the channel matrix is described in detail. This application does not limit the dimensions of the transmitting antenna port, the receiving antenna port, and the channel matrix.
5、基准天线端口与非基准天线端口:如前所述,每个天线单元可以包括多个具有不同辐射特性的天线端口。为便于区分和说明,本申请实施例中将每个天线单元所包括的多个天线端口分为基准天线端口和非基准天线端口。5. Reference antenna port and non-reference antenna port: As mentioned above, each antenna unit may include multiple antenna ports with different radiation characteristics. To facilitate distinction and description, in the embodiment of the present application, the multiple antenna ports included in each antenna unit are divided into reference antenna ports and non-reference antenna ports.
需注意,基准天线端口和非基准天线端口是相对而言的。在同一个天线单元的多个天线端口中,各天线端口的辐射特性彼此互不相同。为了便于区分,将其中的一个端口定义为基准天线端口,将同一天线单元中的其他一个或多个天线端口定义为非基准发射天线端口。It should be noted that the reference antenna port and the non-reference antenna port are relative terms. Among the multiple antenna ports of the same antenna unit, the radiation characteristics of the antenna ports are different from each other. In order to facilitate the distinction, one of the ports is defined as a reference antenna port, and the other one or more antenna ports in the same antenna unit are defined as a non-reference transmitting antenna port.
例如,对于二端口天线单元来说,每个天线单元可以包括一个基准天线端口和一个非基准天线端口;对于四端口天线单元来说,每个天线单元可以包括一个基准天线端口和三个非基准天线端口。其中,每个天线单元中的基准天线端口可以是预定义的,本申请对此不作限定。并且,对于同一类型的多个天线单元来说,基准天线端口具有相同或相似的辐射特性。For example, for a two-port antenna unit, each antenna unit may include a reference antenna port and a non-reference antenna port; for a four-port antenna unit, each antenna unit may include a reference antenna port and three non-reference antenna ports. Antenna port. Wherein, the reference antenna port in each antenna unit may be predefined, which is not limited in this application. Moreover, for multiple antenna units of the same type, the reference antenna port has the same or similar radiation characteristics.
举例而言,上文结合图2所描述的双极化天线单元中,端口1、端口3、端口5、端口7为第一极化方向的天线端口,可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的基准天线端口,端口2、端口4、端口6、端口8则可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的非基准天线端口;或者,端口2、端口4、端口6、端口8为第二极化方向的天线端口,也可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的基准天线端口,而端口1、端口3、端口5、端口7则可以被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的非基准天线端口。For example, in the dual-polarization antenna unit described above in conjunction with FIG. 2, port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 are the antenna ports in the first polarization direction, which can be respectively defined as their respective antenna units. In the reference antenna port, port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 can be respectively defined as the non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong; or, port 2, port 4, port 6, and port 8 are the first The antenna ports in the two polarization directions can also be defined as the reference antenna ports in their respective antenna units, while port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 can be defined as non-standard antenna ports in their respective antenna units. Reference antenna port.
又例如,上文结合图3所描述的四端口QHA单元中,端口1、端口5具有相同的辐射特性,可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的基准天线端口,而端口2、端口3、端口4、端口6、端口7、端口8则可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的非基准天线端口;或者,端口2、端口6具有相同的辐射特性,也可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的基准天线端口,而端口1、端口3、端口4、端口5、端口7、端口8则可以分别被定义为各自所属的天线单元中的非基准天线端口。以此类推,为了简洁,这里不再举例说明。For another example, in the four-port QHA unit described above in conjunction with FIG. 3, port 1 and port 5 have the same radiation characteristics and can be respectively defined as the reference antenna port in the antenna unit to which they belong, and port 2, port 3 , Port 4, port 6, port 7, and port 8 can be respectively defined as non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong; or, port 2 and port 6 have the same radiation characteristics, or they can be defined as respective The reference antenna port in the antenna unit to which it belongs, and port 1, port 3, port 4, port 5, port 7, and port 8 can be respectively defined as non-reference antenna ports in the antenna unit to which they belong. By analogy, for the sake of brevity, I will not give an example here.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,以双极化方向天线单元和四端口QHA单元为例,对基准天线端口和非基准天线端口做了详细说明,但这不应对本申请所适用的天线单元的类型和所包含的端口数构成任何限定。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding. Taking dual-polarization direction antenna units and four-port QHA units as examples, the reference antenna ports and non-reference antenna ports are described in detail, but this does not apply to the antenna units applicable to this application. The type and number of ports included constitute any limit.
此外,在介绍本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法之前,做出如下几点说明。In addition, before introducing the instructions and methods for determining channel state information provided by the embodiments of the present application, the following descriptions are made.
第一,在本申请实施例中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。例 如,当描述某一指示信息用于指示信息I时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示I或间接指示I,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有I。First, in the embodiments of the present application, "used to indicate" may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication. For example, when describing a certain indication information to indicate information I, it can include the indication information directly indicating I or indirectly indicating I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。The information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc. The information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance.
例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of a pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in an agreement) of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and give unified instructions, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information.
举例来说,在多个发射天线单元内的端口差异信息相同或相似的情况下,对多个发射天线单元的端口差异信息可以统一指示。如,通过一个信元(information element,IE)来指示端口差异信息,该信元所指示的端口差异信息可适用于上述多个发射天线单元。换言之,该信元所指示的端口差异信息是可以被上述多个发射天线单元通用的信息。由此可以降低对端口差异信息的指示开销。下文中多处涉及对同样的信息的指示,为了简洁,后文省略对相同或相似情况的说明。For example, when the port difference information in multiple transmitting antenna units is the same or similar, the port difference information of the multiple transmitting antenna units can be uniformly indicated. For example, one information element (IE) is used to indicate the port difference information, and the port difference information indicated by the information element may be applicable to the foregoing multiple transmit antenna units. In other words, the port difference information indicated by the information element is information that can be used by the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units. As a result, the overhead of indicating port difference information can be reduced. In the following, there are many instructions for the same information. For the sake of brevity, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted hereafter.
又例如,对多个系数的指示,可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的方式来实现。例如,对N-1个系数的指示,可以通过归一化的方式。具体而言,接收设备可以对该N-1个系数中模值最大的系数的位置和其他N-2个系数相对于该模值最大的系数量化值进行指示,而并不一定要将该N-1个系数的值全部指示。但发送设备可以基于相同的方式确定出该N-1个系数,因此该指示可以认为是对该N-1个系数的指示。下文中多处涉及对多个系数的指示,为了简洁,后文省略对相同或相似情况的说明。For another example, the indication of multiple coefficients can be realized by means of pre-arrangement (for example, stipulated by agreement). For example, the indication of N-1 coefficients can be normalized. Specifically, the receiving device can indicate the position of the coefficient with the largest modulus among the N-1 coefficients and the quantized value of the other N-2 coefficients with respect to the coefficient with the largest modulus, but it is not necessary to The values of -1 coefficients are all indicated. However, the sending device can determine the N-1 coefficients in the same manner, so the indication can be regarded as an indication of the N-1 coefficients. In the following, many places involve the indication of multiple coefficients. For the sake of brevity, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted hereafter.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定。如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific instruction manner may also be various existing instruction manners, such as but not limited to the foregoing instruction manners and various combinations thereof. For the specific details of the various indication modes, reference may be made to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur. In the specific implementation process, the required indication mode can be selected according to specific needs, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the selected indication mode. In this way, the instruction methods involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various methods that enable the party to be instructed to obtain the information to be instructed.
此外,待指示信息可能存在其他等价形式,例如行向量可以表现为列向量,一个矩阵可以通过该矩阵的转置矩阵来表示,一个矩阵也可以表现为向量或者数组的形式,该向量或者数组可以由该矩阵的各个行向量或者列向量相互连接而成,两个向量的克罗内克尔积也可以通过一个向量与另一个向量的转置向量的乘积等形式来表现等。本申请实施例提供的技术方案应理解为涵盖各种形式。举例来说,本申请实施例涉及的部分或者全部特性,应理解为涵盖该特性的各种表现形式。In addition, the information to be indicated may have other equivalent forms. For example, a row vector can be expressed as a column vector, a matrix can be expressed by the transpose matrix of the matrix, and a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of the other vector. The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various forms. For example, some or all of the characteristics involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various manifestations of the characteristics.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令,例如无线资源控制(radio resource control, RRC)信令、介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令,例如MAC-CE,和物理层信令,例如下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的一种或者至少两种的组合。The information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. Wherein, the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, medium access control (MAC) layer signaling, such as MAC-CE , And physical layer signaling, such as one or a combination of at least two of downlink control information (DCI).
第二,在本申请实施例中,为便于描述,在涉及编号时,可以从0开始连续编号。例如,R个传输层可以包括第1个传输层至第R个传输层。以此类推,这里不再一一举例说明。当然,具体实现时不限于此,例如,也可以从1开始连续编号。例如,R个传输层可以包括第0个传输层至第R-1个传输层,等等。Second, in the embodiments of the present application, for ease of description, when serial numbers are involved, serial numbers can be started from 0. For example, the R transport layers may include the first transport layer to the Rth transport layer. By analogy, I will not illustrate them one by one here. Of course, the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, it can also be numbered consecutively starting from 1. For example, the R transport layers may include the 0th transport layer to the R-1th transport layer, and so on.
应理解,上文所述均为便于描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案而进行的设置,而并非用于限制本申请的范围。It should be understood that the above descriptions are all settings to facilitate the description of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not used to limit the scope of the present application.
第三,在本申请中,多处涉及矩阵和向量的变换。为便于理解,这里做同一说明。上角标T表示转置,如A T表示矩阵(或向量)A的转置;上角标H表示共轭转置,如,A H表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭转置。后文中为了简洁,省略对相同或相似情况的说明;上角标*表示共轭,如,A *表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭。此外,上角标*也可以表示复数的共轭。本申请对此不作限定。后文中为了简洁,省略对相同或相似情况的说明。 Third, in this application, the transformation of matrices and vectors is involved in many places. For ease of understanding, the same explanation is given here. The superscript T represents transpose, for example, AT represents the transpose of matrix (or vector) A; the superscript H represents conjugate transpose, for example, A H represents the conjugate transpose of matrix (or vector) A. For the sake of brevity in the following text, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted; the superscript * represents the conjugate, for example, A * represents the conjugate of the matrix (or vector) A. In addition, the superscript * can also indicate the conjugate of a complex number. This application does not limit this. For the sake of brevity in the following text, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted.
第四,在下文示出的实施例中,以终端设备作为接收设备的一例,网络设备作为发送设备的一例,详细说明了本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法。因此下文实施例中的终端设备可以替换为接收设备,网络设备可以替换为发送设备。Fourth, in the embodiments shown below, taking a terminal device as an example of a receiving device and a network device as an example of a sending device, the instructions provided by the embodiments of the present application and the method for determining channel state information are explained in detail. Therefore, the terminal device in the following embodiments can be replaced with a receiving device, and the network device can be replaced with a sending device.
但应理解,这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于接收设备、发送设备具体指代的设备并不作限定。只要发送设备配置的发射天线单元可以提供多个天线端口,均可以使用本申请所提供的方法来指示和确定信道状态信息。However, it should be understood that this should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the devices specifically referred to by the receiving device and the sending device. As long as the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device can provide multiple antenna ports, the method provided in this application can be used to indicate and determine the channel state information.
第五,信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)是当前第三代合作伙伴(3 rd generation partnership project,3GPP)协议中终端设备向网络设备反馈的用于描述信道状态的信息。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请中的接收设备也可以向发送设备也可以发送信道状态信息,以指示发送设备与接收设备之间的信道状态。并且,该信道状态信息也并不限于3GPP协议中所定义的预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI),还可用于指示其他可用于表示信道状态的信息,例如下文所描述的信道的协方差矩阵等。 Fifth, the channel state information (channel state information, CSI) is the protocol information of the current feedback to the terminal apparatus for describing channel network device Third Generation Partnership state (3 rd generation partnership project, 3GPP ). But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The receiving device in this application may also send channel state information to the sending device to indicate the channel state between the sending device and the receiving device. Moreover, the channel state information is not limited to the precoding matrix indicator (PMI) defined in the 3GPP protocol, and can also be used to indicate other information that can be used to indicate the channel state, such as the covariance of the channel described below. Matrix etc.
第六,本申请对很多特性(例如克罗内克尔(Kronecker)积、预编码向量、信道等)所列出的定义仅用于以举例方式来解释该特性的功能,其详细内容可以参考现有技术。Sixth, the definitions listed in this application for many characteristics (such as Kronecker product, precoding vector, channel, etc.) are only used to explain the function of this characteristic by way of example. For details, please refer to current technology.
第七,在下文示出的实施例中第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的指示信息等。Seventh, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different instructions.
第八,“预定义”或“预配置”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Eighth, “pre-defined” or “pre-configured” can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the equipment (for example, including terminal equipment and network equipment). The specific implementation method is not limited. Wherein, "saving" may refer to storing in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第九,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Ninth, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第十,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”, 描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Tenth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c. Among them, a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
第十一,在本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”等描述均指在某种客观情况下设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求设备(如,终端设备或者网络设备)在实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。Eleventh, in the embodiments of this application, the descriptions such as "when...", "under the condition of...", "if" and "if" all refer to the equipment under certain objective circumstances (such as terminal equipment). Or the network device) will make the corresponding processing, which is not a time limit, and the device (such as a terminal device or a network device) is not required to have a judging action when it is implemented, nor does it mean that there are other restrictions.
第十二,在本申请实施例中,多处提及天线端口(或者称,端口)、发射天线端口(或者称,发送天线端口、发送端口)和接收天线端口(或者称,接收端口)。其中发射天线端口为发送设备配置的天线端口,接收天线端口为接收设备配置的天线端口。“发射”和“接收”指示为了便于区分而定义,在不涉及发送设备或接收设备的情况下,不通过发送/接收来区分天线端口。Twelfth, in the embodiments of the present application, antenna ports (or called ports), transmitting antenna ports (or called transmitting antenna ports, transmitting ports), and receiving antenna ports (or called receiving ports) are mentioned in multiple places. The transmitting antenna port is the antenna port configured by the transmitting device, and the receiving antenna port is the antenna port configured by the receiving device. The "transmit" and "receive" indications are defined for the convenience of distinction, and the antenna ports are not distinguished by transmitting/receiving when the transmitting device or the receiving device is not involved.
与之相似,本申请实施例中也有多处涉及天线单元和发射天线单元、基准天线端口和基准发射天线端口、非基准天线端口和非基准发射天线端口。其中,“发射”旨在强调该天线单元、或基准天线端口、或非基准天线端口是配置在发送设备中的天线单元、或基准天线端口、或非基准天线端口。在不涉及发送设备的情况下,可以不强调其为发射天线单元、基准发射天线端口和非基准发射天线端口。Similarly, the embodiments of the present application also involve antenna units and transmitting antenna units, reference antenna ports and reference transmitting antenna ports, non-reference antenna ports and non-reference transmitting antenna ports. Among them, "transmit" is intended to emphasize that the antenna unit, or reference antenna port, or non-reference antenna port is the antenna unit, or reference antenna port, or non-reference antenna port configured in the transmitting device. In the case that the transmitting device is not involved, it may not be emphasized that it is a transmitting antenna unit, a reference transmitting antenna port, and a non-reference transmitting antenna port.
下文中诸如此类的情况均可以参照上文所述来理解,为了简洁,不再举例说明。The following situations and the like can be understood with reference to the above, and for the sake of brevity, no examples are given.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法。The method for indicating and determining channel state information provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于包括发送设备和接收设备的系统中。该方法可用于指示发送设备与接收设备之间的信道状态信息。在本申请实施例中,发送设备可以包括一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元包括多个发射天线端口。且,每个发射天线单元所包含的多个发射天线端口可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口。在本申请实施例中,各发射天线单元包含的发射天线端口数相同,例如均为N(N>1且为整数)个。接收设备也可以包括一个或多个接收天线端口。本申请对此不作限定。一个基准发射天线端口和一个接收天线端口之间的信道可以称为一个基准传输信道。换言之,一个基准发射天线端口和一个接收天线端口构成一个基准传输信道。The method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a system including a sending device and a receiving device. This method can be used to indicate the channel state information between the sending device and the receiving device. In the embodiment of the present application, the transmitting device may include one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes multiple transmitting antenna ports. Moreover, the multiple transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port. In the embodiment of the present application, the number of transmit antenna ports included in each transmit antenna unit is the same, for example, N (N>1 and an integer). The receiving device may also include one or more receiving antenna ports. This application does not limit this. The channel between a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port can be referred to as a reference transmission channel. In other words, a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port constitute a reference transmission channel.
可选地,发送设备为网络设备,接收设备为终端设备。该终端设备可以基于本申请实施例所提供的方法向网络设备指示下行信道的信道状态信息。下面将以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的指示信道状态信息的方法。应理解,本申请对于发送设备和接收设备并不做限定。只要发送设备配置有包含有具有不同辐射特性的发射天线端口的天线单元,下文所述的方法均可以使用。Optionally, the sending device is a network device, and the receiving device is a terminal device. The terminal device can indicate the channel state information of the downlink channel to the network device based on the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. The following will take the interaction between the network device and the terminal device as an example to describe in detail the method for indicating channel state information provided in the embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that this application does not limit the sending device and the receiving device. As long as the transmitting device is configured with antenna units including transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics, the methods described below can be used.
还应理解,下文仅为便于理解和说明,以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的方法。但这不应对本申请提供的方法的执行主体构成任何限定。用于执行本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可。例如,下文实施 例示出的终端设备可以替换为终端设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块,如,配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。下文实施例示出的网络设备也可以替换为网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块,如,配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。It should also be understood that the following is only for ease of understanding and description, and the interaction between the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. However, this should not constitute any limitation on the execution subject of the method provided in this application. The execution subject for executing the method provided by the embodiment of the present application only needs to be able to communicate according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. For example, the terminal device shown in the following embodiments can be replaced with a functional module in the terminal device that can call and execute the program, such as a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device. The network device shown in the following embodiment can also be replaced with a functional module in the network device that can call and execute the program, for example, a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device.
还应理解,本申请实施例中,终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。It should also be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device and/or the network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or various operations. Deformation of the operation. In addition, each step may be executed in a different order presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it may not be necessary to perform all the operations in the embodiments of the present application.
下面结合图5详细说明本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法。图5是从设备交互的角度示出的指示信道状态信息的方法500的示意性流程图。如图5所示,该方法500可以包括步骤510至步骤540。下面详细说明方法500中的各步骤。The method for indicating and determining channel state information provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method 500 for indicating channel state information from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 5, the method 500 may include step 510 to step 540. The steps in the method 500 are described in detail below.
在步骤510中,终端设备生成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。In step 510, the terminal device generates reference channel state information and port difference information.
基准信道状态信息具体可以是指由至少一个基准传输信道得到的信道状态信息。由于每个基准传输信道由一个基准天线端口和一个接收天线端口构成,故基准信道状态信息可以是由发送设备中多个发射天线单元中的至少一个基准发射天线端口与接收设备中的一个或多个接收端口之间的信道而确定。The reference channel state information may specifically refer to channel state information obtained from at least one reference transmission channel. Since each reference transmission channel is composed of a reference antenna port and a receiving antenna port, the reference channel state information can be composed of at least one of the multiple transmitting antenna units in the transmitting device and one or more of the receiving device. The channel between the receiving ports is determined.
基准信道状态信息例如可以是基准传输信道的信道本身,也可以对该至少一个基准传输信道进行数学变换之后而得到。比如,将至少一个基准信道所构成的矩阵进行数学变换而得到。下文会结合具体的例子来说明基准信道状态信息,这里暂且省略对基准信道状态信息的详细描述。The reference channel state information may be, for example, the channel itself of the reference transmission channel, or it may be obtained after performing mathematical transformation on the at least one reference transmission channel. For example, the matrix formed by at least one reference channel is obtained by mathematical transformation. The reference channel state information will be described below in conjunction with specific examples, and a detailed description of the reference channel state information will be omitted here.
由于每个基准发射天线端口属于一个发射天线单元,而每个发射天线单元还包括至少一个非基准发射天线端口,终端设备还可以进一步指示端口之间的辐射特性的差异,以便将非基准发射天线端口与接收端口之间的信道状态信息也通过端口间的辐射特性差异间接地表示出来。Since each reference transmitting antenna port belongs to a transmitting antenna unit, and each transmitting antenna unit also includes at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port, the terminal device may further indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between the ports, so that the non-reference transmitting antenna The channel state information between the port and the receiving port is also indirectly expressed through the difference in radiation characteristics between the ports.
在本申请实施例中,每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以通过端口差异信息来表示。In the embodiment of the present application, the radiation characteristic difference between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit may be represented by port difference information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,端口差异信息可以通过系数来表征。任意一个非基准天线端口与基准天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异均可以通过系数来表征。In a possible implementation manner, the port difference information can be characterized by coefficients. The difference in radiation characteristics between any non-reference antenna port and the reference antenna port can be characterized by coefficients.
例如,假设双极化天线单元中第一极化方向的天线端口为基准天线端口,第二极化方向的天线端口为非基准天线端口。基准天线端口与非基准天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异可以通过系数α来表征。For example, suppose that the antenna port in the first polarization direction in the dual-polarization antenna unit is a reference antenna port, and the antenna port in the second polarization direction is a non-reference antenna port. The difference in radiation characteristics between the reference antenna port and the non-reference antenna port can be characterized by a coefficient α.
又例如,假设四端口QHA单元中的基准天线端口与同一天线单元中的另三个非基准天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异也可以分别通过系数α 1、α 2、α 3来表征。 For another example, suppose that the difference in radiation characteristics between a reference antenna port in a four-port QHA unit and the other three non-reference antenna ports in the same antenna unit can also be characterized by coefficients α 1 , α 2 , and α 3 respectively .
进一步地,另三个非基准天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异也可以通过系数来表征。如,三个非基准天线端口中每两个天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异可以分别通过α 4、α 5、α 6来表征。后文会结合具体实施例详细说明各系数与端口之间的关系,这里暂且不作详述。 Further, the difference in radiation characteristics between the other three non-reference antenna ports can also be characterized by coefficients. For example, the difference in radiation characteristics between each of the three non-reference antenna ports can be characterized by α 4 , α 5 , and α 6 respectively . The relationship between each coefficient and the port will be described in detail below in conjunction with specific embodiments, and will not be described in detail here.
如此一来,任意一个非基准发射天线端口与某一接收天线端口之间的信道和基准发射天线端口与同一接收天线端口之间的信道之间可以通过该系数来关联。比如,假设双极化发射天线单元中,第一极化方向的发射天线端口与第二极化方向的发射天线端口之间的辐 射特性的差异可以通过系数α来表征,则第一极化方向的发射天线端口与某一接收天线端口之间的信道(例如记作h 1)与第二极化方向的发射天线端口与同一接收天线端口之间的信道(例如记作h 2)的差异也可以通过系数α来关联。如,h 2=αh 1In this way, the channel between any non-reference transmitting antenna port and a certain receiving antenna port and the channel between the reference transmitting antenna port and the same receiving antenna port can be correlated by the coefficient. For example, assuming that in a dual-polarization transmitting antenna unit, the difference in radiation characteristics between the transmitting antenna port in the first polarization direction and the transmitting antenna port in the second polarization direction can be characterized by the coefficient α, then the first polarization direction The difference between the channel between the transmitting antenna port and a certain receiving antenna port (for example, denoted as h 1 ) and the channel between the transmitting antenna port in the second polarization direction and the same receiving antenna port (for example, denoted as h 2 ) is also It can be related by the coefficient α. For example, h 2 =αh 1 .
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示例性地示出了两个极化方向的发射天线端口分别与同一接收天线端口之间的信道的关系。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the foregoing is only for ease of understanding, and exemplarily shows the channel relationship between the transmitting antenna ports of the two polarization directions and the same receiving antenna port. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,端口差异信息可以由上述系数而得到。比如,由上述系数所构成的矩阵进行数学变换而得到。由于下文会结合具体的例子来说明端口差异信息,这里暂且省略对端口差异信息的详细描述。In another possible implementation manner, the port difference information can be obtained from the aforementioned coefficients. For example, the matrix formed by the above coefficients is obtained by mathematical transformation. Since the port difference information will be described below in conjunction with specific examples, a detailed description of the port difference information will be omitted for the time being.
为便于理解和说明,下面结合上文所列举的二端口天线单元和四端口天线单元来详细说明基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。For ease of understanding and description, the reference channel state information and port difference information will be described in detail below in conjunction with the two-port antenna unit and the four-port antenna unit listed above.
作为一个实施例,发送设备所配置的发射天线单元为二端口天线单元。为便于理解,这里先假设接收设备所配置的接收天线端口数为1。下文实施例首先以一个发射天线单元为例来说明一个二端口天线单元与一个接收天线端口间的信道,然后进一步说明多个二端口天线单元与一个接收天线端口间的信道。As an embodiment, the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device is a two-port antenna unit. For ease of understanding, it is assumed here that the number of receiving antenna ports configured by the receiving device is 1. The following embodiment firstly uses a transmitting antenna unit as an example to illustrate the channel between a two-port antenna unit and one receiving antenna port, and then further illustrates the channel between multiple two-port antenna units and one receiving antenna port.
对于一个二端口天线单元来说,它可以包括一个基准天线端口和一个非基准天线端口。假设,该二端口天线单元为上文结合图2所描述的双极化天线单元中的一个,如包括端口1和端口2。则该发射天线单元中的两个发射天线端口与接收天线端口之间的信道H可以表示为H=[h 1 h 2]。 For a two-port antenna unit, it may include a reference antenna port and a non-reference antenna port. It is assumed that the two-port antenna unit is one of the dual-polarized antenna units described above in conjunction with FIG. 2, such as including port 1 and port 2. Then the channel H between the two transmitting antenna ports and the receiving antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit can be expressed as H=[h 1 h 2 ].
如前所述,该两个发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以通过系数α表征,该两个发射天线端口分别与接收天线端口之间的信道可以通过系数α来关联,即h 2=αh 1。那么,上述发射天线单元中的两个发射天线与接收天线端口之间的信道可以表示为h 1[1 α]。由此可以将非基准发射天线端口与接收端口之间的信道也通过基准传输信道来表示。 As mentioned above, the difference in radiation characteristics between the two transmitting antenna ports can be characterized by the coefficient α, and the channels between the two transmitting antenna ports and the receiving antenna ports can be related by the coefficient α, that is, h 2 =αh 1 . Then, the channel between the two transmitting antennas and the receiving antenna port in the above transmitting antenna unit can be expressed as h 1 [1 α]. Therefore, the channel between the non-reference transmitting antenna port and the receiving port can also be represented by the reference transmission channel.
进一步地,该信道H的协方差矩阵H HH可以表示为[h 1 h 2] H[h 1 h 2],通过系数α可关联h 1和h 2,可得到
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000002
下文中为方便说明,将H HH记为R HH。下文实施例中,H HH和R HH交替使用,在未作出特别说明的情况下,其所表达的含义是相同的。
Further, the covariance matrix H H H of the channel H can be expressed as [h 1 h 2 ] H [h 1 h 2 ], and h 1 and h 2 can be correlated through the coefficient α, and we can get
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000002
Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, H H H is denoted as R HH . In the following examples, H H H and R HH are used interchangeably, and unless otherwise specified, the meanings expressed are the same.
若该发送设备包括多个二端口天线单元,如图2中所示的4个双极化天线单元,包括端口1至端口8。则该发送设备中的各发射天线端口与该接收天线端口之间的信道H可以表示为H=[h 1 h 2 … h 7 h 8]。若将端口1、端口3、端口5、端口7定义为基准发射天线端口,则基于上文相似的推导,该信道H也可以表示为H=[h 1 α 1h 1 h 3 α 2h 3 h 5 α 3h 5 h 7 α 4h 7]。其中,α 1、α 2、α 3、α 4分别为发射天线单元1、发射天线单元2、发射天线单元3、发射天线单元4中基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异。 If the transmitting device includes multiple two-port antenna units, as shown in FIG. 2, the four dual-polarized antenna units include port 1 to port 8. Then the channel H between each transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port in the transmitting device can be expressed as H=[h 1 h 2 ... H 7 h 8 ]. If port 1, port 3, port 5, and port 7 are defined as reference transmitting antenna ports, based on the similar derivation above, the channel H can also be expressed as H=[h 1 α 1 h 1 h 3 α 2 h 3 h 5 α 3 h 5 h 7 α 4 h 7 ]. Among them, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , and α 4 are the radiation characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit 1, the transmitting antenna unit 2, the transmitting antenna unit 3, and the transmitting antenna unit 4, respectively. difference.
因此,每个发射天线单元与一个接收端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵都可以表示为类似于
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000003
的形式。例如,对于发射天线单元1,其与接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000004
对于发射天线单元2,其与接收天线端口之间的信 道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000005
对于发射天线单元3,其与接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000006
对于发射天线单元4,其与接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000007
Therefore, the covariance matrix of the channel between each transmitting antenna unit and a receiving port can be expressed as similar to
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000003
form. For example, for the transmitting antenna unit 1, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000004
For the transmitting antenna unit 2, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000005
For the transmitting antenna unit 3, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000006
For the transmitting antenna unit 4, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000007
可选地,多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异相同或相似。换言之,多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异可以通过相同的系数来表征,或者说,对于该多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异可以统一指示,比如,通过同一信元指示。由此,对某一发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异可以适用于上述多个发射天线单元。Optionally, the radiation characteristic differences among the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar. In other words, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in multiple transmitting antenna units can be characterized by the same coefficient, or in other words, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units can be uniformly indicated, for example, by the same cell. . Therefore, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in a certain transmitting antenna unit can be applied to the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
例如,上文所示的发射天线单元1中的端口1和端口2之间的辐射特性差异、发射天线单元2中的端口3和端口4之间的辐射特性差异、发射天线单元3中的端口5和端口6之间的辐射特性差异以及发射天线单元4中的端口7和端口8的辐射特性差异均可以通过同一系数来表示。即,α 1=α 2=α 3=α 4。此情况下,多个发射天线单元中的发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差可以表示为: For example, the radiation characteristic difference between port 1 and port 2 in transmitting antenna unit 1, the radiation characteristic difference between port 3 and port 4 in transmitting antenna unit 2, and the port in transmitting antenna unit 3 shown above are The radiation characteristic difference between port 5 and port 6 and the radiation characteristic difference of port 7 and port 8 in the transmitting antenna unit 4 can all be represented by the same coefficient. That is, α 1234 . In this case, the covariance of the channel between the transmitting antenna port and one receiving antenna port in the multiple transmitting antenna units can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000008
其中,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000009
表示克罗内克尔积。
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000008
among them,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000009
Represents Kronecker product.
事实上,各发射天线端口与接收天线端口之间的信道并不一定要通过每个发射天线单元中的基准发射天线端口来表示。例如,各发射天线单元之间的差异也可以通过系数来表征,例如,h 3=βh 1。或者,各发射天线单元也可以是相同的,可以通过同一个发射天线单元内的发射天线端口与接收天线端口之间的信道来表示,例如,h 3=h 1。换言之,上述基准信道状态信息可以是基于上述多个发射天线单元中的至少一个发射天线单元对应的至少一个基准传输信道得到的信道状态信息。 In fact, the channel between each transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port does not necessarily have to be represented by the reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit. For example, the difference between each transmitting antenna unit can also be characterized by a coefficient, for example, h 3 =βh 1 . Alternatively, the transmitting antenna units may also be the same, which may be represented by the channel between the transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port in the same transmitting antenna unit, for example, h 3 =h 1 . In other words, the above-mentioned reference channel state information may be channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel corresponding to at least one of the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
下文中为方便理解和说明,假设多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异相同或相似。即,多个发射天线单元中的基准发射天线与非基准发射天线之间的辐射特性差异均通过系数来α表征。对不同的信道仍通过不同的下角标来区分,如h 1、h 3、h 5和h 7In the following, for ease of understanding and explanation, it is assumed that the radiation characteristic differences between the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar. That is, the radiation characteristic differences between the reference transmitting antenna and the non-reference transmitting antenna in the multiple transmitting antenna units are all characterized by the coefficient α. Different channels are still distinguished by different subscripts, such as h 1 , h 3 , h 5 and h 7 .
为便于理解,将上文列举的多个计算式中,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000010
左边的部分记作R AA
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000011
右边的部分记作R QQ。也就是说,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000012
其中,R AA与基准传输信道相关,R QQ与端口间的辐射特性相关。上文所述的基准信道状态信息例如可以是R AA,或者对R AA进行数学变换而得到的结果。上文所述的端口差异信息例如可以是R QQ,或者对R QQ进行数学变换而得到的结果。
For ease of understanding, among the multiple calculation formulas listed above,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000010
The left part is denoted as R AA ,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000011
The part on the right is denoted as R QQ . In other words,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000012
Among them, R AA is related to the reference transmission channel, and R QQ is related to the radiation characteristics between ports. The above-mentioned reference channel state information may be , for example, R AA or a result obtained by performing mathematical transformation on R AA. The aforementioned port difference information may be , for example, R QQ , or a result obtained by performing mathematical transformation on R QQ.
结合上例,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000013
进一步观察R AA可以 发现,R AA还可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000014
计算得到,也即,R AA可以由[h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7] H[h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7]计算得到。若将[h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7]记为H',则R AA=(H') HH'。
Combining the above example,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000013
Looking further at R AA, we can find that R AA can also pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000014
It is calculated, that is, R AA can be calculated from [h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7 ] H [h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7 ]. If [h 1 h 3 h 5 h 7 ] is written as H', then R AA =(H') H H'.
与之相似地,若接收天线端口数大于1,如接收天线端口数为2(比如端口1和端口2),则可以将信道H表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000015
对该信道H进一步求协方差矩阵,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000016
若通过上文所述的
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000017
来表示,则可以得到:
Similarly, if the number of receiving antenna ports is greater than 1, for example, the number of receiving antenna ports is 2 (such as port 1 and port 2), then channel H can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000015
Further seeking the covariance matrix for this channel H, we can get
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000016
If it passes the above
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000017
To express, you can get:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000018
也即,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000019
That is,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000019
为便于理解,下文示例性地给出了对由R HH得出R AA和R QQ的过程。应理解,下文所示的公式推导过程仅为便于理解而示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。 For ease of understanding, the process of deriving R AA and R QQ from R HH is exemplarily given below. It should be understood that the formula derivation process shown below is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
若令h 1=[h 11 h 12 … h 18],h 2=[h 21 h 22 … h 28],则可以得到:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000020
If h 1 =[h 11 h 12 … h 18 ], h 2 = [h 21 h 22 … h 28 ], we can get:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000020
将h 1=[h 11 h 12 … h 18],h 2=[h 21 h 22 … h 28]代入便可得到: Substituting h 1 =[h 11 h 12 … h 18 ], h 2 = [h 21 h 22 … h 28 ] can be obtained:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000021
进一步观察R AA可以发现,R AA还可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000022
计算得到。若将
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000023
记为H',则R AA=(H') HH'。
Looking further at R AA, we can find that R AA can also pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000022
Calculated. If will
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000023
Denoted as H', then R AA =(H') H H'.
以此类推,若发射天线端口数大于1,如发射天线端口数为T(比如包括端口1至端口T,T>1且为整数);若接收天线端口数也大于1,如接收天线端口数为M(比如包括端口1至端口M,M>1且为整数),则可以将信道H表示为:By analogy, if the number of transmitting antenna ports is greater than 1, such as the number of transmitting antenna ports is T (for example, including port 1 to port T, T>1 and an integer); if the number of receiving antenna ports is also greater than 1, such as the number of receiving antenna ports Is M (for example, including port 1 to port M, M>1 and an integer), then channel H can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000024
对该信道H进一步求协方差矩阵,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000025
进一步推导可以得到:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000024
Further seeking the covariance matrix for this channel H, we can get
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000025
Further derivation can be obtained:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000026
若通过上文所述的
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000027
来表示,则可以得到:
If it passes the above
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000027
To express, you can get:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000028
进一步观察R AA可以发现,R AA还可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000029
计算得到。若将
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000030
记为H',则R AA=(H') HH'。
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000028
Further observation of R AA can reveal that R AA can also pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000029
Calculated. If will
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000030
Denoted as H', then R AA =(H') H H'.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了不同的发射天线端口数、不同的接收天线端口数的情况下的信道、信道的协方差矩阵以及基准传输信道等。但上文所示的公式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。比如,对端口号的命名规则不同,上式中的角标可能会发生变化。本领域的技术人基于相同的构思,可以对上文所列举的公式进行数学变换或等价替换,这些数学变换或等价替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding, and shows the channel, the covariance matrix of the channel, the reference transmission channel, etc. in the case of different numbers of transmitting antenna ports and different numbers of receiving antenna ports. However, the formula shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, if the naming rules for port numbers are different, the subscripts in the above formula may change. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements on the formulas listed above, and these mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements should fall within the protection scope of this application.
作为另一个实施例,发送设备所配置的发射天线单元为四端口天线单元。为便于理解,这里先假设接收设备所配置的接收天线端口数为1。下文实施例首先以一个发射天线单元为例来说明一个四端口天线单元与一个接收天线端口之间的信道,然后进一步说明多个四端口天线单元与一个接收天线端口间的信道。As another embodiment, the transmitting antenna unit configured by the transmitting device is a four-port antenna unit. For ease of understanding, it is assumed here that the number of receiving antenna ports configured by the receiving device is 1. The following embodiment first uses a transmitting antenna unit as an example to illustrate the channel between a four-port antenna unit and one receiving antenna port, and then further illustrates the channel between multiple four-port antenna units and one receiving antenna port.
对于一个四端口天线单元说,它可以包括一个基准天线端口和三个非基准天线端口。假设,该四端口天线单元为上文结合图3所描述的四端口QHA单元中的一个,如包括端口1、端口2、端口3和端口4。则该发射天线单元中的四个发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口之间的信道H可以表示为H=[h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4]。 For a four-port antenna unit, it can include one reference antenna port and three non-reference antenna ports. It is assumed that the four-port antenna unit is one of the four-port QHA units described above with reference to FIG. 3, such as including port 1, port 2, port 3, and port 4. Then the channel H between the four transmitting antenna ports and one receiving antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit can be expressed as H=[h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4 ].
如前所述,该四个发射天线端口中三个非基准发射天线端口与基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异可以分别通过系数α 1、α 2、α 3表征,每个非基准发射天线端口与基准发射天线端口之间的信道可以通过系数来关联,例如h 2=α 1h 1,h 3=α 2h 1,h 4=α 3h 1。那么,上述发射天线单元中的两个发射天线与接收天线端口之间的信道可以表示为h 1[1 α 1 α 2 α 3]。由此可以将非基准发射天线端口与接收端口之间的信道也通过基准传输信道来表示。 As mentioned above, the difference in radiation characteristics between the three non-reference transmitting antenna ports and the reference transmitting antenna port among the four transmitting antenna ports can be characterized by the coefficients α 1 , α 2 , and α 3 , and each non-reference transmitting antenna The channel between the port and the reference transmitting antenna port can be related by coefficients, for example, h 21 h 1 , h 32 h 1 , and h 43 h 1 . Then, the channel between the two transmitting antennas and the receiving antenna port in the above transmitting antenna unit can be expressed as h 1 [1 α 1 α 2 α 3 ]. Therefore, the channel between the non-reference transmitting antenna port and the receiving port can also be represented by the reference transmission channel.
进一步地,该信道H的协方差矩阵H HH可以表示为[h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4] H[h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4],通过系数α 1、α 2、α 3可关联h 1和h 2、h 3、h 4,可得到
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000031
其中,h 2=α 1h 1,h 3=α 2h 1,h 4=α 3h 1,且h 2 *h 3=α 1 *h 1 *α 2h 1,h 2 *h 4=α 1 *h 1 *α 3h 1,h 3 *h 4=α 2 *h 1 *α 3h 1。进一步通过系数α 4、α 5、α 6来关联端口2和端口3、端口2和端口4以及端口3和端口4,α 4=α 1 *α 2,α 5=α 1 *α 3,α 6=α 2 *α 3。由此可以得到:h 2 *h 3=α 4h 1 *h 1,h 2 *h 4=α 5h 1 *h 1,h 3 *h 4=α 6h 1 *h 1。因此,信道H的协方差矩阵H HH可以表示为:
Further, the covariance matrix H H H of the channel H can be expressed as [h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4 ] H [h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4 ], which can be correlated through the coefficients α 1 , α 2 , and α 3 h 1 and h 2 , h 3 , h 4 , we can get
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000031
Among them, h 21 h 1 , h 32 h 1 , h 43 h 1 , and h 2 * h 31 * h 1 * α 2 h 1 , h 2 * h 4 = α 1 * h 1 * α 3 h 1 , h 3 * h 4 = α 2 * h 1 * α 3 h 1 . Further associate port 2 and port 3, port 2 and port 4, and port 3 and port 4 through coefficients α 4 , α 5 , α 6 , α 41 * α 2 , α 5 = α 1 * α 3 , α 6 = α 2 * α 3 . From this, it can be obtained: h 2 * h 34 h 1 * h 1 , h 2 * h 4 = α 5 h 1 * h 1 , and h 3 * h 4 = α 6 h 1 * h 1 . Therefore, the covariance matrix H H H of channel H can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000032
可以看到,上文中通过系数α 4、α 5、α 6来关联端口2和端口3、端口2和端口4以及端口3和端口4的过程中,也是以端口1对应的基准传输信道为基准来关联的。换言之,上文中用于表示端口2和端口3之间的辐射特性差异的系数α 4、用于表示端口2和端口4之间的辐射特性差异的系数α 5、用于表示端口3和端口4之间的辐射特性差异的系数α 6都可理解为相对于端口1对应的基准传输信道的值。 It can be seen that in the above process of correlating port 2 and port 3, port 2 and port 4, and port 3 and port 4 through the coefficients α 4 , α 5 , and α 6, the reference transmission channel corresponding to port 1 is also used as the benchmark. To associate. In other words, the coefficient α 4 used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 3, the coefficient α 5 used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 4, and the coefficient α 5 used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 3 and port 4 in the above The coefficient α 6 of the difference in radiation characteristics can be understood as a value relative to the reference transmission channel corresponding to port 1.
若该发送设备包括多个四端口天线单元,如图3中所示的2个四端口QHA天线单元,包括端口1至端口8。则该发送设备中的各发射天线端口与该接收天线端口之间的信道可以表示为H=[h 1 h 2 … h 7 h 8]。若将端口1、端口5定义为基准发射天线端口,则基于上文相似的推导,该信道H也可以表示为: If the transmitting device includes multiple four-port antenna units, as shown in FIG. 3, the two four-port QHA antenna units include port 1 to port 8. Then the channel between each transmitting antenna port in the transmitting device and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as H=[h 1 h 2 ... H 7 h 8 ]. If ports 1 and 5 are defined as reference transmitting antenna ports, based on the similar derivation above, the channel H can also be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000033
其中,每个系数的上角标表示所属的天线单元,下角标表示在所属的天线单元中非基准发射天线端口与基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性的差异。如,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000034
可用于表示发射天线 单元1中的端口2与端口1之间的辐射特性差异,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000035
可用于表示发射天线单元2中的端口2与端口1之间的辐射特性差异,以此类推,这里不一一列举说明。
Wherein, the superscript of each coefficient indicates the antenna unit to which it belongs, and the subscript indicates the difference in radiation characteristics between the non-reference transmitting antenna port and the reference transmitting antenna port in the corresponding antenna unit. Such as,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000034
Can be used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 1 in the transmitting antenna unit 1,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000035
It can be used to indicate the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 1 in the transmitting antenna unit 2, and so on, and it is not listed here.
例如,对于发射天线单元1,其与接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000036
对于发射天线单元2,其与接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000037
For example, for the transmitting antenna unit 1, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000036
For the transmitting antenna unit 2, the covariance matrix of the channel between it and the receiving antenna port can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000037
可选地,多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异相同。换言之,多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异可以通过相同的系数来表征。例如,上文所示的发射天线单元1中的端口1和端口2之间的辐射特性差异、发射天线单元2中的端口5和端口6之间的辐射特性差异可以通过同一系数表示。即,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000038
发射天线单元1中的端口1和端口3之间的辐射特性差异、发射天线单元2中的端口5和端口7之间的辐射特性差异可以通过同一系数表示。即,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000039
发射天线单元1中的端口1和端口4之间的辐射特性差异、发射天线单元2中的端口5和端口8之间的辐射特性差异可以通过同一系数表示。即,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000040
Optionally, the radiation characteristic difference among the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same. In other words, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in multiple transmitting antenna units can be characterized by the same coefficient. For example, the radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 2 in the transmitting antenna unit 1 and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 6 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 shown above can be represented by the same coefficient. which is,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000038
The radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 3 in the transmitting antenna unit 1, and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 7 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 can be represented by the same coefficient. which is,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000039
The radiation characteristic difference between the port 1 and the port 4 in the transmitting antenna unit 1, and the radiation characteristic difference between the port 5 and the port 8 in the transmitting antenna unit 2 can be represented by the same coefficient. which is,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000040
若令
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000041
则上述多个发射天线单元中的发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口之间的信道的协方差矩阵可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000042
Ruo Ling
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000041
Then the covariance matrix of the channel between the transmitting antenna port and one receiving antenna port in the multiple transmitting antenna units can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000042
事实上,各发射天线端口与接收天线端口之间的信道并不一定要通过每个发射天线单元中的基准发射天线端口来表示。例如,各发射天线单元之间的差异也可以通过系数来表征,例如,h 5=βh 1。或者,各发射天线单元也可以是相同的,可以通过同一个发射天线单元内的发射天线端口与接收天线端口之间的信道来表示,例如,h 5=h 1。换言之,上述基准信道状态信息可以是基于上述多个发射天线单元中的至少一个发射天线单元对应的至少一个基准传输信道得到的信道状态信息。 In fact, the channel between each transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port does not necessarily have to be represented by the reference transmitting antenna port in each transmitting antenna unit. For example, the difference between each transmitting antenna unit can also be characterized by a coefficient, for example, h 5 =βh 1 . Alternatively, the transmitting antenna units may also be the same, which may be represented by the channel between the transmitting antenna port and the receiving antenna port in the same transmitting antenna unit, for example, h 5 =h 1 . In other words, the above-mentioned reference channel state information may be channel state information obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel corresponding to at least one of the above-mentioned multiple transmitting antenna units.
下文中为便于理解和说明,假设多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异相同或相似。即,多个发射天线单元中的基准发射天线与非基准发射天线之间的辐射特性差异均通过系数来α 1至α 6表征。对不同的信道仍通过不同的下角标来区分,如h 1、h 5In the following, for ease of understanding and description, it is assumed that the radiation characteristic differences between the ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units are the same or similar. That is, the radiation characteristic differences between the reference transmitting antenna and the non-reference transmitting antenna in the multiple transmitting antenna units are all characterized by coefficients α 1 to α 6 . Different channels are still distinguished by different subscripts, such as h 1 , h 5 .
基于上文对二端口天线单元的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的说明,可以知道,信道H的协方差矩阵可以满足:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000043
在本实施例中,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000045
其中,R AA可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000046
计算得到,也即,R AA可以由[h 1 h 5] H[h 1 h 5]计算得到。若[h 1 h 5]将记为H',则R AA=(H') HH'。
Based on the above description of the reference channel state information and port difference information of the two-port antenna unit, it can be known that the covariance matrix of channel H can satisfy:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000043
In this embodiment,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000045
Among them, R AA can pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000046
It is calculated, that is, R AA can be calculated from [h 1 h 5 ] H [h 1 h 5 ]. If [h 1 h 5 ] will be recorded as H', then R AA =(H') H H'.
与之相似地,若发射天线端口数大于1,如发射天线端口数为T(比如包括端口1至端口T,T>1且为整数);若接收天线端口数大于1,如接收天线端口数为M(比如包括端口1至端口M),则可以将信道H表示为:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000047
对该信道H进一步求协方差矩阵,可以得到
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000048
进一步推导可以得到:
Similarly, if the number of transmitting antenna ports is greater than 1, such as the number of transmitting antenna ports is T (for example, including port 1 to port T, T>1 and an integer); if the number of receiving antenna ports is greater than 1, such as the number of receiving antenna ports Is M (for example, including port 1 to port M), then channel H can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000047
Further seeking the covariance matrix for this channel H, we can get
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000048
Further derivation can be obtained:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000049
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000049
若通过上文所述的
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000050
来表示,则可以得到:
If it passes the above
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000050
To express, you can get:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000051
进一步观察R AA可以发现,R AA还可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000052
计算得到。若将
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000053
记为H',则R AA=(H') HH'。
Looking further at R AA, we can find that R AA can also pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000052
Calculated. If will
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000053
Denoted as H', then R AA =(H') H H'.
应理解,上文仅为便于理解,示出了不同的发射天线端口数、不同的接收天线端口数的情况下的信道、信道的协方差矩阵以及基准传输信道等。但上文所示的公式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。比如,对端口号的命名规则不同,上式中的角标可能会发生变化。本领域的技术人基于相同的构思,可以对上文所列举的公式进行数学变换或等价替换,这些数学变换或等价替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。It should be understood that the above is only for ease of understanding, and shows the channel, the covariance matrix of the channel, the reference transmission channel, etc. in the case of different numbers of transmitting antenna ports and different numbers of receiving antenna ports. However, the formula shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, if the naming rules for port numbers are different, the subscripts in the above formula may change. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements on the formulas listed above, and these mathematical transformations or equivalent replacements should fall within the protection scope of this application.
下面将结合多种不同的实现方式来详细说明终端设备对基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的指示。The following describes in detail the indication of the reference channel state information and the port difference information by the terminal device in combination with a variety of different implementation manners.
终端设备例如可以将信道的协方差矩阵指示给网络设备,以便于网络设备基于终端设备的指示恢复信道的协方差矩阵。终端设备对信道的协方差矩阵的指示例如可以基于上式
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000054
来分别指示R AA和R QQ
For example, the terminal device may indicate the covariance matrix of the channel to the network device, so that the network device can restore the covariance matrix of the channel based on the instruction of the terminal device. The indication of the covariance matrix of the channel by the terminal device may be based on the above formula, for example
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000054
To indicate R AA and R QQ respectively .
终端设备也可以将与该信道相适配的预编码矩阵指示给网络设备,以便于网络设备基于终端设备的指示确定与该信相适配的预编码矩阵。终端设备对预编码矩阵的指示例如可以是对应于R个传输层中的每个传输层的预编码向量的指示。对于R个传输层中的第r个传输层,可以通过
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000055
来指示相对应的预编码向量。其中,p r为对应于第r个传输层的预编码向量;v r可以是对R AA进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)得到的R个特征向量中的第r个特征向量;q r可以是对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量中的第r个特征向量。其中,r可以在1至R中遍历取值。即,r=1,2,……,R。
The terminal device may also indicate the precoding matrix adapted to the channel to the network device, so that the network device can determine the precoding matrix adapted to the signal based on the instruction of the terminal device. The indication of the precoding matrix by the terminal device may be, for example, an indication of the precoding vector corresponding to each of the R transmission layers. For the rth transport layer in R transport layers, you can pass
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000055
To indicate the corresponding precoding vector. Where p r is the precoding vector corresponding to the r-th transmission layer; v r may be the r-th eigenvector among the R eigenvectors obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on R AA; q r may be the r-th eigenvector among the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R QQ. Among them, r can traverse the value from 1 to R. That is, r=1, 2, ..., R.
下面分别详细说明基准信道状态信息的指示和对端口差异信息的指示。The following is a detailed description of the indication of the reference channel state information and the indication of the port difference information.
1、基准信道状态信息:1. Reference channel status information:
假设对H'进行SVD可以表示为H'=UΛV H。则对R AA进行SVD的过程如下:R AA=(H') HH'=(UΛV H) HUΛV H=VΛU HUΛV H=VΛ 2V H。若V=[v 1 v 2 … v R],则
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000056
其中,diag[]表示对角阵。
Assuming that SVD is performed on H', it can be expressed as H'=UΛV H. Then the process of performing SVD on R AA is as follows: R AA =(H') H H'=(UΛV H ) H UΛV H =VΛU H UΛV H =VΛ 2 V H. If V=[v 1 v 2 … v R ], then
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000056
Among them, diag[] represents a diagonal array.
其中,R表示最大传输层数,或者说,基于信道测量所确定的信道的秩(rank)。R≥1且为整数。v 1至v R表示对应于第1个传输层至第R个传输层的特征向量,a 1至a R表示对应于第1个传输层至第R个传输层的特征值。该R个特征值可用于指示R个传输层对应的向量(如,特征向量,或者,预编码向量)之间的功率比例。故该R个特征值可以称为R个功率系数。 Among them, R represents the maximum number of transmission layers, or in other words, the rank of the channel determined based on channel measurement. R≥1 and is an integer. v 1 to v R represent eigenvectors corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Rth transmission layer, and a 1 to a R represent eigenvalues corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Rth transmission layer. The R eigenvalues may be used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors (eg, eigenvectors, or precoding vectors) corresponding to the R transmission layers. Therefore, the R eigenvalues can be called R power coefficients.
也就是说,基准信道状态信息可用于指示对应于R个传输层的信息。如上所述,该记住信道信息可用于指示对应于R个传输层的R个向量。That is, the reference channel state information can be used to indicate information corresponding to R transport layers. As described above, the remembered channel information can be used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transport layers.
可以看到,对R AA进行SVD所得到的结果中,对角矩阵左侧的酉矩阵和右侧的酉矩阵的共轭转置相同,即,对R AA进行SVD所得到的R个特征向量可以理解为是由基准传输信道H'确定的对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。若将由基准传输信道所确定的R AA进行SVD所得到的R个特征向量进一步结合上文所述的端口差异信息,便可用于确定对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。因此下文中所述的对R AA的指示在某种意义上也可以理解为是对预编码向量的指示的一部分。 It can be seen that in the result of performing SVD on R AA , the unitary matrix on the left side of the diagonal matrix and the unitary matrix on the right have the same conjugate transpose, that is, the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R AA It can be understood as a precoding vector corresponding to R transmission layers determined by the reference transmission channel H′. If the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on the R AA determined by the reference transmission channel are further combined with the port difference information described above, they can be used to determine the precoding vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers. Therefore, the indication of R AA described below can also be understood as a part of the indication of the precoding vector in a certain sense.
示例性地,若接收天线端口数为1,对R AA进行SVD可以得到最多一个传输层的预编码向量。即,在本实施例中,R AA=v 1a 1v 1 *。该预编码向量可以由上述特征向量v 1和特征值a 1确定。 Exemplarily, if the number of receiving antenna ports is 1, performing SVD on R AA can obtain a precoding vector of at most one transmission layer. That is, in this embodiment, R AA =v 1 a 1 v 1 * . The precoding vector can be determined by the aforementioned feature vector v 1 and feature value a 1 .
若接收天线端口数为2,对R AA进行SVD可以得到最多两个传输层的预编码向量。即,在本实施例中,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000057
该预编码向量可以由上述特征向量v 1、v 2和特征值a 1、a 2确定。由此可以看到,对R AA的指示和对v r的指示本质上是相同的,都是对上述R个特征向量的指示。因此,终端设备对基准信道状态信息的指示可 以包括对上述R个特征向量的指示。
If the number of receiving antenna ports is 2, performing SVD on R AA can obtain up to two transmission layer precoding vectors. That is, in this embodiment,
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000057
The precoding vector may be determined by the aforementioned feature vectors v 1 , v 2 and feature values a 1 , a 2 . It can be seen from this that the indication of R AA and the indication of v r are essentially the same, and both are indications of the above R eigenvectors. Therefore, the indication of the reference channel state information by the terminal device may include the indication of the above-mentioned R feature vectors.
下文示例性地给出了对该R个特征向量的几种可能的实现方式。Several possible implementations of the R eigenvectors are exemplarily given below.
在一种实现方式中,该R个特征向量例如可以通过端口选择(port selection)的方式来指示。例如,该R个特征向量中的每个特征向量可以通过预定义的基底向量集合中与之最为接近的一个基底向量的索引来指示。In an implementation manner, the R feature vectors may be indicated by way of port selection, for example. For example, each feature vector of the R feature vectors may be indicated by the index of a basis vector closest to it in the predefined basis vector set.
假设基底向量集合中的向量记作b,比如R个特征向量中的第r个特征向量,可以通过基底向量b r来指示。终端设备在指示该基底向量b r时,例如可以指示该基底向量b r在基底向量集合中的索引。 Assuming that the vector in the basis vector set is denoted as b, for example, the r-th eigenvector among R eigenvectors can be indicated by the basis vector b r. When the terminal device indicates the basis vector b r , for example, it may indicate the index of the basis vector b r in the basis vector set.
在另一种实现方式中,该R个特征向量也可以通过波束线性叠加(beam combine)的方式来指示。例如,该R个特征向量中的每个特征向量可以通过预定义的基底向量集合中一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和来近似地表征。此情况下,对R个特征向量的指示例如可以是该基底向量集合中被选择的一个或多个基底向量及其对应的线性叠加系数。In another implementation manner, the R eigenvectors may also be indicated by beam combining. For example, each of the R eigenvectors may be approximately characterized by the linear superposition and sum of one or more basis vectors in the predefined basis vector set. In this case, the indication of the R feature vectors may be, for example, one or more selected basis vectors and their corresponding linear superposition coefficients in the basis vector set.
例如,R个特征向量中的每个特征向量可以通过基底向量集合中的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和来指示。假设基底向量集合中的向量记作b,比如R个特征向量中的第r个特征向量,可以通过L个基底向量
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000058
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000059
的线性叠加和来指示。
For example, each feature vector in the R feature vectors may be indicated by the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set. Assuming that the vector in the basis vector set is denoted as b, for example, the r-th eigenvector in R eigenvectors can be passed through L basis vectors
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000058
to
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000059
The linear superposition and sum to indicate.
终端设备对基底向量集合中一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和的指示可以包括对该一个或多个基底向量的指示以及对该一个或多个基底向量所对应的线性叠加系数的指示。The terminal device's indication of the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set may include an indication of the one or more basis vectors and an indication of the linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the one or more basis vectors.
其中,对一个或多个基底向量的指示,比如对上述L个基底向量的指示,可以通过对该一个或多个基底向量分别在基底向量集合中的索引来指示,也可以指示该一个或多个基底向量的组合在基底向量集合中的索引来指示。对一个或多个基底向量的指示的具体方式可以参考现有技术。本申请对此不作限定。Wherein, the indication of one or more basis vectors, such as the indication of the above L basis vectors, can be indicated by the index of the one or more basis vectors in the basis vector set, or can indicate the one or more basis vectors. The combination of the two basis vectors is indicated by the index in the basis vector set. For the specific manner of indicating one or more basis vectors, reference may be made to the prior art. This application does not limit this.
对上述一个或多个基底向量对应的线性叠加系数的指示,比如对上述
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000060
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000061
的指示,可以通过归一化方式来指示,或者采用量化值或量化值的索引来指示,或者上述两种方式结合来指示等。对一个或多个线性叠加系数的指示的具体方式可以参考现有技术。本申请对此不作限定。应理解,对一个或多个线性叠加系数的指示并不一定要对每个线性叠加系数都做了指示,比如在采用归一化方式来指示时,可能仅指示了其中一部分线性叠加系数的值,但依然可以基于所指示的信息确定出该一个或多个线性叠加系数。
An indication of the linear superposition coefficient corresponding to the above one or more basis vectors, such as the above
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000060
to
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000061
The indication of can be indicated in a normalized manner, or indicated by a quantized value or an index of a quantized value, or a combination of the above two methods. For the specific manner of indicating one or more linear superposition coefficients, reference may be made to the prior art. This application does not limit this. It should be understood that the indication of one or more linear superposition coefficients does not necessarily indicate each linear superposition coefficient. For example, when the normalization method is used to indicate, it may only indicate the value of some of the linear superposition coefficients. , But the one or more linear superposition coefficients can still be determined based on the indicated information.
进一步地,基准信道状态信息还可用于指示对R AA进行SVD得到的与上述R个特征向量对应的R个特征值。对该R个特征值的指示例如可以通过归一化的方式,或者,也可以通过指示各特征值的量化值或量化值的索引的方式来指示,或者,还可以通过上述两种方式相结合的方式来指示各系数,或者,还可以通过其他现有技术中的方式来指示各特征值。本申请对此不作限定。 Further, the reference channel state information can also be used to indicate the R eigenvalues corresponding to the above R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R AA. The indication of the R feature values can be, for example, normalized, or can also be indicated by indicating the quantized value of each feature value or the index of the quantized value, or can also be a combination of the above two methods To indicate each coefficient, or to indicate each feature value in other prior art methods. This application does not limit this.
可以理解的是,特征值可以表示各传输层的特征向量之间的功率比例。因此在本实施例中,在基准信道状态信息中指示特征值,可以提高反馈精度。例如通过对特征值的指示,来指示各传输层对应的预编码向量之间的功率比例,从而提高码本反馈精度。It can be understood that the eigenvalue can represent the power ratio between the eigenvectors of each transmission layer. Therefore, in this embodiment, the characteristic value is indicated in the reference channel state information, which can improve the feedback accuracy. For example, by indicating the characteristic value, the power ratio between the precoding vectors corresponding to each transmission layer is indicated, thereby improving the codebook feedback accuracy.
2、端口差异信息:2. Port difference information:
终端设备对端口差异信息的指示例如可以是对上述R QQ的指示,也可以是对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量的指示。 The terminal device's indication of the port difference information may be, for example, an indication of the aforementioned R QQ , or an indication of R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
如前所述,终端设备基于信道H的协方差矩阵所确定的R QQ中包括N(N-1)/2个系 数。若对R QQ进行SVD可以得到R个特征向量,每个特征向量中包括N-1个系数。终端设备对端口差异信息的指示可以是对R QQ的指示,也可以是对R个特征向量的指示,或者,还可以是对其中第1个特征向量的指示。本申请对此不作限定。 As mentioned above, the R QQ determined by the terminal device based on the covariance matrix of the channel H includes N(N-1)/2 coefficients. If SVD is performed on R QQ , R eigenvectors can be obtained, and each eigenvector includes N-1 coefficients. The terminal device's indication of the port difference information may be an indication of R QQ, an indication of R eigenvectors, or an indication of the first eigenvector among them. This application does not limit this.
其中,将对R QQ的指示与上文所述对R AA的指示结合,可以确定信道的协方差矩阵。将对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量的指示与上文所述对R AA进行SVD得到的R个特征向量的指示结合,可以确定对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。而对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量中的第1个特征向量的指示可以是将该特征向量应用到R个传输层,以用于确定对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。上述对R个特征向量的指示可以理解为是对q 1至q R都分别做了指示。与之相对,对该R个特征向量中的第1个特征向量的指示可以理解为是对q 1至q R的一次统一的指示,或者说,假设q 1=……=q R,则可以对该R个特征向量仅通过一个特征向量来近似地指示。 Wherein, the indication of R QQ is combined with the indication of R AA described above to determine the covariance matrix of the channel. Combining the indications of the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R QQ with the indications of the R eigenvectors obtained by performing SVD on R AA as described above, the precoding vectors corresponding to the R transmission layers can be determined. The indication of the first feature vector among the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ may be to apply the feature vector to the R transmission layers to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the R transmission layers. The above indication of the R eigenvectors can be understood as indicating respectively q 1 to q R. In contrast, the indication of the first eigenvector of the R eigenvectors can be understood as a unified indication of q 1 to q R , or, assuming that q 1 =...=q R , then The R feature vectors are approximately indicated by only one feature vector.
如前所述,多个发射天线单元中的端口间辐射特性差异可以彼此互不相同。故该端口差异信息所包含的发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射差异特性可以通过多个类似于上文所述的R QQ来表示。终端设备对该端口差异信息的指示可以包括对多个R QQ的指示或多组q r的指示。这里,每组q r可对应于一个发射天线单元,可以包括q 1至q RAs mentioned above, the difference in radiation characteristics between ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units may be different from each other. Therefore, the radiation difference characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit included in the port difference information can be represented by multiple R QQs similar to those described above. The terminal device's indication of the port difference information may include an indication of multiple R QQ or multiple q r indications. Here, each group of q r may correspond to one transmitting antenna unit, and may include q 1 to q R.
多个发射天线单元中的端口见辐射差异特性差异也可以相同。故该端口差异信息所包含的发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射差异特性可以通过同一个R QQ来表示。终端设备对该端口差异信息的指示可以仅包括对一个R QQ或一组q r的指示。这里,一组q r可以包括q 1至q RThe ports in the multiple transmitting antenna units can also be the same in terms of radiation difference characteristics. Therefore, the radiation difference characteristics between the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference transmitting antenna port in the transmitting antenna unit included in the port difference information can be represented by the same R QQ . The terminal device's indication of the port difference information may only include an indication of one R QQ or a group of q r . Here, the set of q r may include q 1 to q R.
下面以一个R QQ为例来说明对端口差异信息的指示。为便于理解和说明,假设每个发射天线单元中包括N(N≥2且为整数)个具有不同辐射特性的发射天线端口。 The following uses an R QQ as an example to illustrate the instructions for port difference information. For ease of understanding and description, it is assumed that each transmitting antenna unit includes N (N≥2 and an integer) transmitting antenna ports with different radiation characteristics.
可选地,端口差异信息包括对R QQ中N(N-1)/2个系数的指示。例如,对于四端口天线单元,假设端口1为基准发射天线端口,则对R QQ的指示可以包括对6个系数的指示。该6个系数可以分别用于表示:端口1与端口2间的辐射特性的差异、端口1与端口3间的辐射特性的差异、端口1与端口4间的辐射特性的差异、端口2与端口3间的辐射特性的差异相对于端口1的值、端口2与端口4间的辐射特性的差异相对于端口1的值以及端口3与端口4间的辐射特性的差异相对于端口1的值。 Optionally, the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients in R QQ. For example, for a four-port antenna unit, assuming that port 1 is the reference transmitting antenna port, the indication of R QQ may include an indication of 6 coefficients. The six coefficients can be used to represent: the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 2, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 3, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 1 and port 4, and port 2 and port The difference in radiation characteristics among 3 relative to the value of port 1, the difference in radiation characteristics between port 2 and port 4 relative to the value of port 1, and the difference in radiation characteristics between port 3 and port 4 relative to the value of port 1.
可选地,端口差异信息包括对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量中的每个特征向量中N-1系数的指示。 Optionally, the port difference information includes an indication of the N-1 coefficient in each of the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
例如,对R QQ进行SVD可以得到R个特征向量q 1至q R。每个特征向量中包括N-1个系数。终端设备可以对每个特征向量分别指示N-1个系数,以便于网络设备确定该R个特征向量q 1至q RFor example, performing SVD on R QQ can obtain R feature vectors q 1 to q R. Each feature vector includes N-1 coefficients. The terminal device may indicate N-1 coefficients for each feature vector, so that the network device can determine the R feature vectors q 1 to q R.
该R个特征向量q 1至q R可以分别与上文所述的R个特征向量v 1至v R结合,以用于确定对应于R个传输层的预编码向量p 1至p R。如前所述,由
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000062
可以确定对应于第r个传输层的预编码向量。
The R feature vectors q 1 to q R can be combined with the R feature vectors v 1 to v R described above, respectively, to determine the precoding vectors p 1 to p R corresponding to the R transmission layers. As mentioned earlier, by
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000062
The precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer can be determined.
可选地,端口差异信息包括对R QQ进行SVD得到的R个特征向量中的某一个特征向量中N-1个系数的指示。 Optionally, the port difference information includes an indication of N-1 coefficients in one of the R feature vectors obtained by performing SVD on the R QQ.
终端设备可以指示R个特征向量中的某一个特征向量中的N-1个系数,以便于网络设 备确定可适用于R个传输层的N-1个系数。换言之,用于确定R个传输层的预编码向量分别使用的特征向量可以是相同的。也就是说,终端设备可以对对应于该R个传输层的特征向量q 1至q R统一指示,例如通过同一信元来指示其中某一个特征向量。对于网络设备来说,每个传输层对应的预编码向量均可以由终端设备统一指示的这一特征向量来确定。 The terminal device may indicate the N-1 coefficients in a certain characteristic vector of the R characteristic vectors, so that the network device can determine the N-1 coefficients applicable to the R transmission layers. In other words, the feature vectors used to determine the precoding vectors of the R transmission layers may be the same. That is, the terminal device can uniformly indicate the feature vectors q 1 to q R corresponding to the R transmission layers, for example, indicate a certain feature vector through the same cell. For the network device, the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer can be determined by the feature vector uniformly indicated by the terminal device.
示例性地,终端设备可以指示该R个特征向量中的第1个q 1中的N-1个系数。网络设备由该N-1个系数所确定的特征向量q 1可以作为分别与上文所述的R个特征向量v 1至v R结合,以用于确定对应于R个传输层的预编码向量p 1至p R。如前所述,由
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000063
可以确定对应于第r个传输层的预编码向量。在本实施例中,可以将q r替换为q 1
Exemplarily, the terminal device may indicate N-1 coefficients in the first q 1 of the R feature vectors. The feature vector q 1 determined by the network device from the N-1 coefficients can be combined with the R feature vectors v 1 to v R described above to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the R transmission layers. p 1 to p R. As mentioned earlier, by
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000063
The precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer can be determined. In this embodiment, q r can be replaced with q 1 .
当然,终端设备也可以将R个特征向量中的其他特征向量指示给网络设备,以适用于R个传输层,本申请对此不作限定。Of course, the terminal device may also indicate other feature vectors in the R feature vectors to the network device to apply to the R transport layers, which is not limited in this application.
由于对某一个特征向量的指示可以用于R个传输层中的任意一个传输层的预编码向量的确定。即,可以将这个特征向量作为对应于R个传输层的q 1至q r。因此,从某种意义上说,对该特征向量的指示也可以理解为是对q 1至q r这R个特征向量的指示。 Because the indication of a certain feature vector can be used to determine the precoding vector of any one of the R transmission layers. That is, this feature vector can be regarded as q 1 to q r corresponding to R transmission layers. Therefore, in a sense, the indication of the feature vector can also be understood as an indication of the R feature vectors from q 1 to q r.
终端设备对各系数的指示可以有很多种。例如,终端设备可以通过归一化的方式来指示,或者,终端设备也可以通过指示各系数的量化值或量化值的索引的方式来指示各系数,或者,还可以通过上述两种方式相结合的方式来指示各系数,或者,还可以通过其他现有技术中的方式来指示各系数。本申请对此不作限定。The terminal equipment can indicate various coefficients in many ways. For example, the terminal device can indicate in a normalized manner, or the terminal device can indicate each coefficient by indicating the quantized value of each coefficient or the index of the quantized value, or it can also be a combination of the above two methods To indicate the coefficients, or to indicate the coefficients in other prior art methods. This application does not limit this.
可以看到,不管发射天线单元包括的发射天线端口数为多少,接收天线端口数为多少,终端设备都可以将信道状态信息转换成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息来指示。例如在本申请实施例中,可以通过对R AA的指示和对R QQ的指示来指示信道的协方差矩阵,或者,可以通过对v 1至v R的指示和对q 1至q R的指示来指示对应于R个传输层的预编码向量。 It can be seen that regardless of the number of transmitting antenna ports and receiving antenna ports included in the transmitting antenna unit, the terminal device can convert the channel state information into reference channel state information and port difference information for indication. For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the covariance matrix of the channel may be indicated by the indication of R AA and the indication of R QQ , or the indication of v 1 to v R and the indication of q 1 to q R may be used . To indicate the precoding vectors corresponding to R transport layers.
由于上文已经结合多种可能的实现方式详细说明了对基准信道状态信息的指示和对端口差异信息的指示,为了简洁,这里不再重复。Since the indication of the reference channel state information and the indication of the port difference information have been described in detail above in conjunction with multiple possible implementation manners, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,在上文所列举的多个示例中,基准发射天线端口可以是预定义的。比如,协议可以预定义,或者,网络设备与终端设备可以预先协商每个天线单元中用作基准发射天线端口的端口号。本申请对于如何确定基准发射天线端口以及用作基准发射天线端口的端口号均不作限定。It should be noted that in the multiple examples listed above, the reference transmit antenna port may be predefined. For example, the protocol can be predefined, or the network device and the terminal device can negotiate in advance the port number used as the reference transmitting antenna port in each antenna unit. This application does not limit how to determine the reference transmitting antenna port and the port number used as the reference transmitting antenna port.
应理解,在上文多个示例中,为便于理解和说明,多处通过SVD来描述对矩阵R AA、R QQ等的数学变换过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备对矩阵的数学变换为设备的内部实现过程,可通过不同的算法来实现。本申请对此不作限定。 It should be understood that in the above multiple examples, for ease of understanding and explanation, SVD is used to describe the mathematical transformation process of the matrices R AA , R QQ, etc. in many places. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The mathematical transformation of the matrix by the terminal device is the internal realization process of the device, which can be realized through different algorithms. This application does not limit this.
终端设备在生成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息之前,需要预先确定每个发射天线单元中的发射天线端口数N。在本申请实施例中,由于每个发射天线单元可以包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口,故N>1且为整数。Before generating the reference channel state information and port difference information, the terminal device needs to predetermine the number N of transmit antenna ports in each transmit antenna unit. In the embodiment of the present application, since each transmitting antenna unit may include one reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port, N>1 and an integer.
可选地,该方法还包括步骤520,终端设备接收指示信息,该指示信息用于指示N的值。相应地,在步骤520中,网络设备发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示N的值。Optionally, the method further includes step 520. The terminal device receives indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate the value of N. Correspondingly, in step 520, the network device sends instruction information, which is used to indicate the value of N.
其中,N表示每个发射天线单元中包含的发射天线端口数。Among them, N represents the number of transmitting antenna ports included in each transmitting antenna unit.
网络设备例如可以通过高层信令来携带该指示信息,该高层信令例如可以包括RRC消息、MAC-CE等,携带该指示信息。网络设备也可以通过物理层信令来携带该指示信息,该物理层信令例如可以包括DCI等。本申请对用于携带该指示信息的具体信令不作限定。The network device may, for example, carry the indication information through high-level signaling, and the high-level signaling may include, for example, an RRC message, MAC-CE, etc., to carry the indication information. The network device may also carry the indication information through physical layer signaling, and the physical layer signaling may include, for example, DCI. This application does not limit the specific signaling used to carry the indication information.
此外,网络设备对该N值的指示可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示。例如,网络设备可直接指示N的具体取值;又例如,网络设备可通过指示发射天线单元数和总发射端口数来间接指示N的取值。本申请对于网络设备指示N值的具体方式不作限定。In addition, the indication of the N value by the network device may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. For example, the network device may directly indicate the specific value of N; for another example, the network device may indirectly indicate the value of N by indicating the number of transmit antenna units and the total number of transmit ports. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the network device indicates the value of N.
在步骤530中,终端设备发送基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。相对应地,在步骤530中,网络设备接收基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息。In step 530, the terminal device sends reference channel state information and port difference information. Correspondingly, in step 530, the network device receives reference channel state information and port difference information.
具体而言,该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息可以携带在同一个信令,也可以携带在不同的信令中,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the reference channel state information and the port difference information may be carried in the same signaling, or may be carried in different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
在一种可能的设计中,该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息可以携带在CSI报告中。例如可以是CSI报告的PMI中的信息。该CSI报告可以承载在物理上行资源传输给网络设备。该物理上行资源例如可以是物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)资源或物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)资源。本申请对此不作限定。In a possible design, the reference channel state information and port difference information can be carried in the CSI report. For example, it may be the information in the PMI reported by the CSI. The CSI report can be carried on the physical uplink resource and transmitted to the network device. The physical uplink resource may be, for example, a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) resource. This application does not limit this.
应理解,终端设备向网络设备发送信息的具体过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the specific process of the terminal device sending information to the network device can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the process is omitted here.
在步骤540中,网络设备根据该基准状态信息和端口差异信息,确定信道状态信息。In step 540, the network device determines channel state information according to the reference state information and port difference information.
网络设备从终端设备接收到的信息中获取基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的具体过程与终端设备生成该基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的具体过程可以是相对应的。双方可以预先约定对基准信道状态信息的指示方式和对端口差异信息的指示方式,并基于相同的方式分别进行信息的生成和解析。The specific process for the network device to obtain the reference channel state information and port difference information from the information received by the terminal device may correspond to the specific process for the terminal device to generate the reference channel state information and port difference information. The two parties can pre-arrange the indication mode for the reference channel state information and the indication mode for the port difference information, and respectively generate and analyze the information based on the same method.
需要说明的是,下文所列举的网络设备基于对基准状态信息和端口差异信息的解析所确定的R AA、R QQ、R HH、v r、q r、p r等与上文步骤510中终端设备所确定的R AA、R QQ、R HH、v r、q r、p r等相同或相接近。前者是基于对后者的量化和指示所确定。二者的接近程度较大程度地取决于量化精度。本领域的技术人员可以理解其差别。 It should be noted that R AA , R QQ , R HH , v r , q r , p r, etc. determined by the network devices listed below based on the analysis of the reference state information and port difference information are the same as those of the terminal in step 510 above R AA , R QQ , R HH , v r , q r , p r, etc. determined by the equipment are the same or close. The former is determined based on the quantification and instructions of the latter. The closeness of the two depends largely on the quantization accuracy. Those skilled in the art can understand the difference.
基于对基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息的不同的指示方式,网络设备通过对接收到的信息解析可以获得上述基准信道状态信息R AA所确定的R个特征向量和端口差异信息R QQ中的N(N-1)/2个系数;也可以获得上述基准信道状态信息R AA中的v 1至v R这R个特征向量和由端口差异信息R QQ所确定的q 1至q R这R个特征向量。 Based on different indication methods for the reference channel state information and port difference information, the network device can obtain the R feature vectors determined by the reference channel state information R AA and N in the port difference information R QQ by analyzing the received information. (N-1)/2 coefficients; R feature vectors from v 1 to v R in the reference channel state information R AA and R from q 1 to q R determined by the port difference information R QQ can also be obtained Feature vector.
网络设备可以根据终端设备发送的基准信道状态信息,确定R AA。可以理解的是,网络设备对R AA的确定,也就相当于确定了R AA中的v 1至v R这R个特征向量。 The network device may determine R AA according to the reference channel state information sent by the terminal device. It can be understood that the determination of R AA by the network device is equivalent to determining the R feature vectors from v 1 to v R in R AA.
比如,若终端设备指示R个特征向量分别对应的R个基底向量(如上述b 1至b R),则基于该R个基底向量所确定的R AA可以满足以下公式: For example, if the terminal device indicates R base vectors corresponding to R feature vectors (such as b 1 to b R above), R AA determined based on the R base vectors may satisfy the following formula:
R AA=[b 1 … b R] H[b 1 … b R]。 R AA =[b 1 … b R ] H [b 1 … b R ].
若终端设备还进一步指示了对应于R个特征向量的R个特征值(或者说,功率系数),则基于该R个基底向量和R个特征值所确定的R AA可以满足以下公式: If the terminal device further indicates R eigenvalues (or power coefficients) corresponding to R eigenvectors, R AA determined based on the R basis vectors and R eigenvalues may satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000064
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000064
又比如,若终端设备对R个特征向量中的每个特征向量分别通过一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和(如上述
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000066
的线性叠加和)来指示,则基于对应于每个特征向量所指 示的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和所确定的R AA可以满足以下公式:
For another example, if the terminal device performs the linear superposition and linear superposition of one or more base vectors for each of the R feature vectors (as described above)
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000065
to
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000066
Based on the linear superposition and the determined R AA of one or more basis vectors indicated by each feature vector, the following formula can be satisfied:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000067
若终端设备还进一步指示了对应于R个特征向量的R个特征值(或者说,功率系数),则基于对应于每个特征向量所指示的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和和R个特征值所确定的R AA可以满足以下公式: If the terminal device further indicates R eigenvalues (or power coefficients) corresponding to R eigenvectors, it is based on the linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors indicated by each eigenvector and R R AA determined by the characteristic value can satisfy the following formula:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000068
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000068
应理解,上文所列举的R AA所满足的公式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员,基于相同的构思,对上述公式进行数学变换或等价替换,也能够得出对R AA的不同的确定方式。例如,加入系数,如归一化系数或修正系数等;又例如,将部分系数定义为0等。为了简洁,这里不一一列举。但应理解,这些数学变换或等价替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。 It should be understood that the formulas satisfied by R AA listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to this application. Those skilled in the art, based on the same concept, can also obtain different ways of determining R AA by performing mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions on the above formulas. For example, adding coefficients, such as normalization coefficients or correction coefficients, etc.; for another example, defining some coefficients as 0 and so on. For the sake of brevity, I will not list them all here. However, it should be understood that these mathematical transformations or equivalent substitutions should fall within the protection scope of this application.
网络设备终端设备所发送的端口差异信息,可以确定R QQ中的N(N-1)/2个系数,或者也可以根据确定对R QQ进行SVD所得到的N-1个特征值。这取决于终端设备对R QQ的指示方式。 Network equipment port difference information transmitted from the terminal equipment, R QQ can be determined in the N (N-1) / 2 coefficients, or may be determined according to the N-1 R QQ for SVD eigenvalues obtained. It depends on how the terminal device indicates R QQ.
若端口差异信息包括对R QQ中N(N-1)/2个系数的指示,则网络设备根据终端设备发送的端口差异信息,确定出R QQ中的N(N-1)/2个系数,则可以进一步确定信道状态信息为:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000069
If the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients in R QQ , the network device determines the N(N-1)/2 coefficients in R QQ according to the port difference information sent by the terminal device , It can be further determined that the channel state information is:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000069
其中,R HH可对应于上文步骤510中所述的信道H的协方差矩阵H HH。换言之,网络设备基于终端设备所发送的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,可以确定的信道状态信息可以是该信道的协方差矩阵。在确定了信道的协方差矩阵后,网络设备还可以进一步确定对应于R个传输层中每个传输层的预编码向量。 Wherein, R HH may correspond to the covariance matrix H H H of channel H described in step 510 above. In other words, the channel state information that the network device can determine based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information sent by the terminal device may be the covariance matrix of the channel. After determining the covariance matrix of the channel, the network device may further determine the precoding vector corresponding to each of the R transmission layers.
应理解,信道的协方差矩阵并不仅限于用来确定与每个传输层对应的预编码向量。本申请对于网络设备确定了信道的协方差矩阵后的操作不做限定。It should be understood that the covariance matrix of the channel is not limited to determining the precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer. This application does not limit the operation after the network device determines the covariance matrix of the channel.
若端口差异信息包括对q 1至q R这R个特征向量中每个特征向量中N-1个系数的指示,或者包括对第1个特征向量q 1中N-1个系数的指示,则网络设备根据终端设备发送的端口差异信息,确定出对R QQ进行SVD所得到的q 1至q R这R个特征向量,则可以进一步确定信道状态信息为:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000070
If the port difference information includes an indication of N-1 coefficients in each of the R feature vectors from q 1 to q R , or an indication of N-1 coefficients in the first feature vector q 1 , then The network device determines the R eigenvectors q 1 to q R obtained by performing SVD on R QQ according to the port difference information sent by the terminal device, and the channel state information can be further determined as:
Figure PCTCN2019129905-appb-000070
其中,p r为网络设备基于终端设备所指示的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息确定的对应于第r个传输层的预编码向量。v r为网络设备基于终端设备所指示的基准信道状态信息所确定的R个特征向量中的第r个特征向量,可对应于上文步骤510中所述对R AA进行SVD所得的第r个特征向量。q r为网络设备基于终端设备所指示的通过对R QQ进行SVD所确定的第r个特征向量。如前所述,q r可以是对R QQ进行SVD所确定的第r个特征向量,也可以是对R QQ进行SVD所确定的某一个可适用于R个传输层的预编码向量的特征向量。本申请对此不作限定。 Where, p r is a precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer determined by the network device based on the reference channel state information and port difference information indicated by the terminal device. v r is the rth eigenvector among the R eigenvectors determined by the network device based on the reference channel state information indicated by the terminal device, which may correspond to the rth eigenvector obtained by performing SVD on R AA in step 510 above Feature vector. q r is the rth eigenvector determined by the network device by performing SVD on the R QQ based on the terminal device's instruction. As mentioned above, q r can be the r-th eigenvector determined by SVD on R QQ , or a eigenvector determined by SVD on R QQ that is applicable to the precoding vectors of R transmission layers. . This application does not limit this.
此情况下,网络设备基于终端设备所发送的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,可以确定的信道状态信息可以是与该信道相适配的对应于每个传输层的预编码向量。In this case, the network device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information sent by the terminal device, which may be a precoding vector corresponding to each transmission layer adapted to the channel.
应理解,上文列举的网络设备基于终端设备所指示的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息确定信道状态信息的具体实现过程及相关公式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,对上述具体实现过程或公式进行变换或替换,仍然可以确定信道状态信息。但这些变换或替换均应落入本申请的保护范围内。It should be understood that the specific implementation process and related formulas in which the network device listed above determines the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and port difference information indicated by the terminal device are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. Those skilled in the art can still determine the channel state information by transforming or replacing the foregoing specific implementation process or formula based on the same concept. However, these changes or replacements should fall within the scope of protection of this application.
在本申请实施例中,通过对多天线发射天线单元定义基准发射天线端口和非基准天线端口,接收设备可以将信道状态信息转换成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息这两个部分来分别指示。一方面不会造成过大的指示开销,另一方面也能够保证一定的精度。如此一来,发送设备可以基于接收设备所指示的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息确定信道状态信息,进而为后续的数据传输进行合理的决策,例如确定与信道相适配的预编码矩阵等。因此,有利于可以提高通信系统的性能。In the embodiment of the present application, by defining the reference transmitting antenna port and the non-reference antenna port for the multi-antenna transmitting antenna unit, the receiving device can convert the channel state information into two parts of the reference channel state information and the port difference information to indicate separately. On the one hand, it will not cause excessive instruction overhead, on the other hand, it can also guarantee a certain accuracy. In this way, the transmitting device can determine the channel state information based on the reference channel state information and the port difference information indicated by the receiving device, and then make reasonable decisions for subsequent data transmission, such as determining a precoding matrix adapted to the channel. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the performance of the communication system.
应理解,在上文实施例中,终端设备和/或网络设备可以执行各实施例中的部分或全部步骤。这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照各实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。且,各步骤的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the above embodiments, the terminal device and/or the network device may perform part or all of the steps in each embodiment. These steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, each step may be performed in a different order presented in each embodiment, and it may not be necessary to perform all operations in the embodiments of the present application. Moreover, the size of the sequence number of each step does not mean the order of execution. The execution sequence of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation to the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
以上,结合图详细说明了本申请实施例提供的指示和确定信道状态信息的方法。以下,结合图详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。Above, the method for indicating and determining channel state information provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to the figure. Hereinafter, the communication device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to the figure.
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图6所示,该通信装置600可以包括处理单元610和收发单元620。Fig. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the communication device 600 may include a processing unit 610 and a transceiving unit 620.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置600可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备。例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。In a possible design, the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment. For example, it may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the terminal device.
应理解,该通信装置600可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500中的终端设备,该通信装置600可以包括用于执行图5中的方法500中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置600中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 600 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 500 in FIG. 5. In addition, the units in the communication device 600 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 500 in FIG. 5.
其中,当该通信装置600用于执行图5中的方法500时,处理单元610可用于执行方法500中的步骤510,收发单元620可用于执行方法500中的步骤520和步骤530。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 600 is used to execute the method 500 in FIG. 5, the processing unit 610 can be used to execute step 510 in the method 500, and the transceiver unit 620 can be used to execute step 520 and step 530 in the method 500. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置600为终端设备时,该通信装置600中的收发单元620可以通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置600中的处理单元610可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图8中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 600 is a terminal device, the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. The processing unit 610 in 600 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8.
还应理解,该通信装置600为配置于终端设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)时,该通信装置600中的收发单元620可以通过输入/输出接口实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 600 is a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in a terminal device, the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented through an input/output interface.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置600可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)。In another possible design, the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device, or a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in the network device. ).
应理解,该通信装置600可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500中的网络设备,该通 信装置600可以包括用于执行图5中的方法500中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置600中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 600 may correspond to the network device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 600 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 500 in FIG. 5. In addition, the units in the communication device 600 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the corresponding process of the method 500 in FIG. 5.
其中,当该通信装置600用于执行图5中的方法500时,处理单元610可用于执行方法500中的步骤540,收发单元620可用于执行方法500中的步骤520和步骤540。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 600 is used to execute the method 500 in FIG. 5, the processing unit 610 can be used to execute step 540 in the method 500, and the transceiver unit 620 can be used to execute step 520 and step 540 in the method 500. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置600为网络设备时,该通信装置600中的收发单元620可通过收发器实现,例如可对应于图9中示出的网络设备3000中的收发器3200,该通信装置600中的处理单元610可通过至少一个处理器实现,例如可对应于图9中示出的网络设备3000中的处理器3100。It should also be understood that when the communication device 600 is a network device, the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, it may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. The processing unit 610 in 600 may be implemented by at least one processor, for example, may correspond to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 9.
还应理解,该通信装置600为配置于网络设备中的部件(如电路、芯片或芯片系统等)时,该通信装置600中的收发单元620可以通过输入/输出接口实现。It should also be understood that when the communication device 600 is a component (such as a circuit, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 620 in the communication device 600 may be implemented through an input/output interface.
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的另一通信装置700的示意性框图。该天线装置700包括处理器710、收发器720和存储器730。其中,处理器710、收发器720和存储器730通过内部连接通路互相通信,该存储器730用于存储指令,该处理器710用于执行该存储器730存储的指令,以控制该收发器720发送信号和/或接收信号。FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of another communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the present application. The antenna device 700 includes a processor 710, a transceiver 720, and a memory 730. The processor 710, the transceiver 720, and the memory 730 communicate with each other through an internal connection path. The memory 730 is used to store instructions, and the processor 710 is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory 730 to control the transceiver 720 to send signals and / Or receive the signal.
应理解,该通信装置700可以对应于上述方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备,并且可以用于执行上述方法实施例中网络设备或终端设备执行的各个步骤和/或流程。可选地,该存储器730可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器,并向处理器提供指令和数据。存储器的一部分还可以包括非易失性随机存取存储器。存储器730可以是一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器710中。该处理器710可以用于执行存储器730中存储的指令,并且当该处理器710执行存储器中存储的指令时,该处理器710用于执行上述与网络设备或终端设备对应的方法实施例的各个步骤和/或流程。It should be understood that the communication apparatus 700 may correspond to the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment, and may be used to execute various steps and/or processes performed by the network device or the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. Optionally, the memory 730 may include a read-only memory and a random access memory, and provide instructions and data to the processor. A part of the memory may also include a non-volatile random access memory. The memory 730 may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 710. The processor 710 may be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 730, and when the processor 710 executes the instructions stored in the memory, the processor 710 is configured to execute each of the above method embodiments corresponding to the network device or the terminal device. Steps and/or processes.
可选地,上述通信装置700是通信设备,如前述网络设备或终端设备。Optionally, the aforementioned communication apparatus 700 is a communication device, such as the aforementioned network device or terminal device.
收发器720可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器720还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。该处理器710和存储器730与收发器720可以是集成在不同芯片上的期间。如,处理器710和存储器730可以集成在基带芯片中,收发器720可以集成在射频芯片中。该处理器710和存储器730与收发器720也可以是集成在同一个芯片上的器件。本申请对此不作限定。The transceiver 720 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 720 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more. The processor 710, the memory 730, and the transceiver 720 may be integrated on different chips. For example, the processor 710 and the memory 730 may be integrated in a baseband chip, and the transceiver 720 may be integrated in a radio frequency chip. The processor 710, the memory 730, and the transceiver 720 may also be devices integrated on the same chip. This application does not limit this.
当该通信装置700是网络设备时,该通信装置700可以配置有一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口。When the communication device 700 is a network device, the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports.
当该通信装置700是终端设备时,该通信装置700可以配置有一个或多个接收天线端口。When the communication device 700 is a terminal device, the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
可选地,上述通信装置700是通信设备(如前述网络设备或终端设备)中的部件,如芯片等。Optionally, the aforementioned communication device 700 is a component in a communication device (such as the aforementioned network device or terminal device), such as a chip.
图7中的收发器720也可以是通信接口,如输入/输出接口。该收发器720与处理器710和存储器720都可以集成在同一个芯片中,如集成在基带芯片中。The transceiver 720 in FIG. 7 may also be a communication interface, such as an input/output interface. The transceiver 720, the processor 710 and the memory 720 may be integrated in the same chip, such as integrated in a baseband chip.
当该通信装置700是网络设备中的部件时,配置了该通信装置700的网络设备可以配 置有一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元可以包括多个发射天线端口。When the communication device 700 is a component in a network device, the network device configured with the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit may include multiple transmitting antenna ports.
当该通信装置700是终端设备中的部件时,配置了该通信装置700的终端设备可以配置有一个或多个接收天线端口。When the communication device 700 is a component in a terminal device, the terminal device configured with the communication device 700 may be configured with one or more receiving antenna ports.
图8是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示,该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040,用于将收发器2020输出的基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030. Among them, the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the reference channel state information and port difference information output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图6中的处理单元610对应,或者与图7中的处理器710对应。The above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 may be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit 610 in FIG. 6 or the processor 710 in FIG. 7.
上述收发器2020可以与图6中的收发单元620对应,或者也可以与图7中的收发器720对应。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The above-mentioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit 620 in FIG. 6, or may also correspond to the transceiver 720 in FIG. 7. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图8所示的终端设备2000能够实现图5所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send to or receive from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100. The audio circuit It may also include a speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, and so on.
图9是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站3000的结构示意图。该基站3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示,该基站3000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)3100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))3200。所述RRU 3100可以称为收发单元,与图6中的收发单元620对应,或者与图7中的收发器720对应。可选地,该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地,收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 3100部分主要用于射频信号的收发 以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 3200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 3100与BBU 3200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station 3000. The base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in the figure, the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 3200. The RRU 3100 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 620 in FIG. 6 or corresponds to the transceiver 720 in FIG. 7. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals to baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing, control of the base station, and so on. The RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 3200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图6中的处理单元610对应,或者与图7中的处理器710对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息,或,确定信道状态信息等。The BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit. It may correspond to the processing unit 610 in FIG. 6 or the processor 710 in FIG. 7, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding. , Multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum and so on. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information, or to determine the channel state information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 3200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202. The memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图9所示的基站3000能够实现图5所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are to implement the corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and to avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
上述BBU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图9所示出的基站3000仅为网络设备的一种可能的架构,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他架构的网络设备。例如,包含CU、DU和AAU的网络设备等。本申请对于网络设备的具体架构不作限定。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 9 is only a possible architecture of the network device, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to network devices of other architectures. For example, network equipment including CU, DU, and AAU. This application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute a method executed by a terminal device or a network device in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as execution and completion by a hardware processor, or execution and completion by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图5所示实施例中的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 In the method.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图5所示实施例中终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the program shown in FIG. 5 The method executed by the terminal device or the network device in the embodiment.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in each of the above-mentioned device embodiments corresponds completely to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) executes the receiving or the terminal equipment in the method embodiments. In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. Among them, there may be one or more processors.
上述实施例中,终端设备可以作为接收设备的一例,网络设备可以作为发送设备的一例。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,发送设备和接收设备也可以均为终端设备等。本申请对于发送设备和接收设备的具体类型不作限定。In the foregoing embodiment, the terminal device may be used as an example of the receiving device, and the network device may be used as an example of the sending device. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the sending device and the receiving device may both be terminal devices and the like. This application does not limit the specific types of sending equipment and receiving equipment.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实 体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the foregoing embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (26)

  1. 一种指示信道状态信息的方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于包括发送设备和接收设备的系统中,所述发送设备包括一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元包括多个发射天线端口,所述多个发射天线端口包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口,所述接收设备包括一个或多个接收天线端口,一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口构成一个基准传输信道,所述方法包括:A method for indicating channel state information, characterized in that the method is applied to a system including a transmitting device and a receiving device, the transmitting device includes one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes multiple transmitting antennas. An antenna port, the multiple transmitting antenna ports include a reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port, the receiving device includes one or more receiving antenna ports, a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port form one For a reference transmission channel, the method includes:
    生成基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,所述基准信道状态信息基于至少一个基准传输信道得到,所述端口差异信息用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;Generate reference channel state information and port difference information, where the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information is used to indicate the difference between the reference transmit antenna port and the non-reference transmit antenna port in each transmit antenna unit The difference in radiation characteristics;
    发送所述基准信道状态信息和所述端口差异信息。Sending the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个发射天线单元的端口差异信息相同。The method according to claim 1, wherein the port difference information of the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括对N(N-1)/2个系数的指示,N>1且为整数。The method of claim 2, wherein each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients, where N>1 and is Integer.
  4. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括与R个传输层中的每个传输层对应的R组系数的指示,每组系数包括N-1个系数,R≥1,N>1,R、N为整数。The method according to claim 2, wherein each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of R group coefficients corresponding to each of the R transmission layers, Each set of coefficients includes N-1 coefficients, R≥1, N>1, and R and N are integers.
  5. 如权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基准信道状态信息具体用于指示对应于R个传输层的R个向量,R为正整数。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the reference channel state information is specifically used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transmission layers, and R is a positive integer.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量中的第r个向量用于确定对应于所述R个传输层中的第r个传输层的预编码向量,1≤r≤R,r为正整数。The method according to claim 5, wherein the rth vector among the R vectors is used to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer in the R transmission layers, and 1≤r ≤R, r is a positive integer.
  7. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的R个基底向量,所述基准信道状态信息包括对所述基底向量集合中的所述R个基底向量的指示。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the R vectors are R basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set, and the reference channel state information includes a reference to all the basis vectors in the basis vector set. The indication of the R basis vectors.
  8. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量中的每个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和,所述基准信道状态信息包括对所述R个向量中每个向量对应的一个或多个基底向量及其线性叠加系数的指示。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein each of the R vectors is a linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set, and the reference channel state The information includes an indication of one or more basis vectors and their linear superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the R vectors.
  9. 如权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基准信道状态信息还用于指示至少一个功率系数,所述至少一个功率系数用于指示各传输层对应的向量之间的功率比例。The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the reference channel state information is further used to indicate at least one power coefficient, and the at least one power coefficient is used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors corresponding to each transmission layer .
  10. 如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。Receive instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  11. 一种确定信道状态信息的方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于包括发送设备和接收设备的系统中,所述发送设备包括一个或多个发射天线单元,每个发射天线单元包括多个发射天线端口,所述多个发射天线端口包括一个基准发射天线端口和至少一个非基准发射天线端口,所述接收设备包括一个或多个接收天线端口,一个基准发射天线端口与一个接收天线端口构成一个基准传输信道,所述方法包括:A method for determining channel state information, characterized in that the method is applied to a system including a transmitting device and a receiving device. The transmitting device includes one or more transmitting antenna units, and each transmitting antenna unit includes multiple transmitting antennas. An antenna port, the multiple transmitting antenna ports include a reference transmitting antenna port and at least one non-reference transmitting antenna port, the receiving device includes one or more receiving antenna ports, a reference transmitting antenna port and a receiving antenna port form one For a reference transmission channel, the method includes:
    接收基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,所述基准信道状态信息基于至少一个基准传 输信道得到,所述端口差异信息用于指示每个发射天线单元内基准发射天线端口与非基准发射天线端口之间的辐射特性差异;Receive reference channel state information and port difference information, where the reference channel state information is obtained based on at least one reference transmission channel, and the port difference information is used to indicate the difference between the reference transmit antenna port and the non-reference transmit antenna port in each transmit antenna unit The difference in radiation characteristics;
    根据所述基准信道状态信息和端口差异信息,确定所述信道状态信息。The channel state information is determined according to the reference channel state information and the port difference information.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多个发射天线单元的端口差异信息相同。The method according to claim 11, wherein the port difference information of the multiple transmitting antenna units is the same.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括对N(N-1)/2个系数的指示,N>1且为整数。The method according to claim 12, wherein each transmit antenna unit includes N transmit antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of N(N-1)/2 coefficients, where N>1 and is Integer.
  14. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,每个发射天线单元包括N个发射天线端口,所述端口差异信息包括与R个传输层中的每个传输层对应的R组系数的指示,每组系数包括N-1个系数,R≥1,N>1,R、N为整数。The method according to claim 12, wherein each transmitting antenna unit includes N transmitting antenna ports, and the port difference information includes an indication of R group coefficients corresponding to each of the R transmission layers, Each set of coefficients includes N-1 coefficients, R≥1, N>1, and R and N are integers.
  15. 如权利要求11至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基准信道状态信息具体用于指示对应于R个传输层的R个向量,R为正整数。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, wherein the reference channel state information is specifically used to indicate R vectors corresponding to R transmission layers, and R is a positive integer.
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量中的第r个向量用于确定对应于所述R个传输层中的第r个传输层的预编码向量,1≤r≤R,r为正整数。The method according to claim 15, wherein the rth vector among the R vectors is used to determine the precoding vector corresponding to the rth transmission layer in the R transmission layers, and 1≤r ≤R, r is a positive integer.
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的R个基底向量,所述基准信道状态信息包括对所述基底向量集合中的所述R个基底向量的指示。The method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the R vectors are R basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set, and the reference channel state information includes a reference to all the basis vectors in the basis vector set. The indication of the R basis vectors.
  18. 如权利要求15或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述R个向量中的每个向量为预定义的基底向量集合中的一个或多个基底向量的线性叠加和,所述基准信道状态信息包括对所述R个向量中每个向量对应的一个或多个基底向量及其线性叠加系数的指示。The method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein each of the R vectors is a linear superposition sum of one or more basis vectors in a predefined basis vector set, and the reference channel state The information includes an indication of one or more basis vectors and their linear superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the R vectors.
  19. 如权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述基准信道状态信息还用于指示至少一个功率系数,所述至少一个功率系数用于指示各传输层对应的向量之间的功率比例。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the reference channel state information is further used to indicate at least one power coefficient, and the at least one power coefficient is used to indicate the power ratio between the vectors corresponding to each transmission layer .
  20. 如权利要求11至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 19, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示每个发射天线单元的发射天线端口数N。Send instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate the number N of transmit antenna ports of each transmit antenna unit.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述方法的单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求11至20中任一项所述方法的单元。A communication device, characterized by comprising a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 11 to 20.
  23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor, and the at least one processor is used to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the communication device implements any one of claims 1 to 10 method.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求11至20中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that, a communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor, and the at least one processor is configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the communication device realizes the following To the method of any one of 20.
  25. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
  26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11至20中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 11 to 20.
PCT/CN2019/129905 2019-12-30 2019-12-30 Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device WO2021134207A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/129905 WO2021134207A1 (en) 2019-12-30 2019-12-30 Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/129905 WO2021134207A1 (en) 2019-12-30 2019-12-30 Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021134207A1 true WO2021134207A1 (en) 2021-07-08

Family

ID=76686106

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/129905 WO2021134207A1 (en) 2019-12-30 2019-12-30 Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021134207A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103856272A (en) * 2012-12-03 2014-06-11 深圳市通用测试系统有限公司 Method of testing wireless performance of MIMO wireless terminal
WO2014110808A1 (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-24 华为技术有限公司 Method for acquiring channel characteristic, user equipment, and base station
CN106899522A (en) * 2015-12-17 2017-06-27 中国移动通信集团公司 A kind of sending method of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS, device and base station
CN108471324A (en) * 2017-02-23 2018-08-31 索尼公司 Electronic equipment, communication device and signal processing method
US20190253119A1 (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-15 Industrial Technology Research Institute Channel status information reporting method and detecting method and communication device and base station therefor

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103856272A (en) * 2012-12-03 2014-06-11 深圳市通用测试系统有限公司 Method of testing wireless performance of MIMO wireless terminal
WO2014110808A1 (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-24 华为技术有限公司 Method for acquiring channel characteristic, user equipment, and base station
CN106899522A (en) * 2015-12-17 2017-06-27 中国移动通信集团公司 A kind of sending method of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS, device and base station
CN108471324A (en) * 2017-02-23 2018-08-31 索尼公司 Electronic equipment, communication device and signal processing method
US20190253119A1 (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-15 Industrial Technology Research Institute Channel status information reporting method and detecting method and communication device and base station therefor

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "Configuration and control signaling for Rel.13 FD-MIMO", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-150380 CONTROL SIG FDMIMO FINAL, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Athens, Greece; 20150209 - 20150213, 8 February 2015 (2015-02-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP050933590 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220263560A1 (en) Channel state information reporting method and communications apparatus
US11296755B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
WO2021063178A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20240030980A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
US20230164004A1 (en) Channel parameter obtaining method and apparatus
WO2020083057A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
WO2021083157A1 (en) Precoding matrix processing method and communication apparatus
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2024027394A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021159309A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
WO2021203373A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20230239028A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20230019630A1 (en) Update Method and Communications Apparatus
US11784853B2 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2022012256A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2021134207A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining channel state information, and communication device
EP4131825A1 (en) Uplink reference signal sending method, uplink reference signal receiving method, and communication device
WO2024093867A1 (en) Precoding indication method, and communication apparatus
EP4040699A1 (en) Method for configuring transmission port of a downlink reference signal, and communication apparatus
WO2020073788A1 (en) Precoding vector indication and determination method and communication device
WO2024061093A1 (en) Uplink precoding indication method and communication apparatus
WO2021146938A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
WO2021207895A1 (en) Uplink signal transmission method and communication apparatus
US20230379020A1 (en) Precoding method and apparatus
WO2021146961A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19958530

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19958530

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1